bionic (1) hg.1.gz

Provided by: mercurial-common_4.5.3-1ubuntu2.2_all bug

NAME

       hg - Mercurial source code management system

SYNOPSIS

       hg command [option]... [argument]...

DESCRIPTION

       The hg command provides a command line interface to the Mercurial system.

COMMAND ELEMENTS

       files...
              indicates  one or more filename or relative path filenames; see File Name Patterns for information
              on pattern matching

       path   indicates a path on the local machine

       revision
              indicates a changeset which can be specified as a changeset revision number, a tag,  or  a  unique
              substring of the changeset hash value

       repository path
              either the pathname of a local repository or the URI of a remote repository.

OPTIONS

       -R,--repository <REPO>
              repository root directory or name of overlay bundle file

       --cwd <DIR>
              change working directory

       -y, --noninteractive
              do not prompt, automatically pick the first choice for all prompts

       -q, --quiet
              suppress output

       -v, --verbose
              enable additional output

       --color <TYPE>
              when to colorize (boolean, always, auto, never, or debug)

       --config <CONFIG[+]>
              set/override config option (use 'section.name=value')

       --debug
              enable debugging output

       --debugger
              start debugger

       --encoding <ENCODE>
              set the charset encoding (default: UTF-8)

       --encodingmode <MODE>
              set the charset encoding mode (default: strict)

       --traceback
              always print a traceback on exception

       --time time how long the command takes

       --profile
              print command execution profile

       --version
              output version information and exit

       -h, --help
              display help and exit

       --hidden
              consider hidden changesets

       --pager <TYPE>
              when to paginate (boolean, always, auto, or never) (default: auto)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

COMMANDS

   add
       add the specified files on the next commit:

       hg add [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Schedule files to be version controlled and added to the repository.

       The files will be added to the repository at the next commit. To undo an add before that, see hg forget.

       If no names are given, add all files to the repository (except files matching .hgignore).

       Examples:

          • New (unknown) files are added automatically by hg add:

            $ ls
            foo.c
            $ hg status
            ? foo.c
            $ hg add
            adding foo.c
            $ hg status
            A foo.c

          • Specific files to be added can be specified:

            $ ls
            bar.c  foo.c
            $ hg status
            ? bar.c
            ? foo.c
            $ hg add bar.c
            $ hg status
            A bar.c
            ? foo.c

       Returns 0 if all files are successfully added.

       Options:

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       -n, --dry-run
              do not perform actions, just print output

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   addremove
       add all new files, delete all missing files:

       hg addremove [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Add all new files and remove all missing files from the repository.

       Unless  names  are  given,  new files are ignored if they match any of the patterns in .hgignore. As with
       add, these changes take effect at the next commit.

       Use the -s/--similarity option to detect  renamed  files.  This  option  takes  a  percentage  between  0
       (disabled)  and  100  (files  must  be identical) as its parameter. With a parameter greater than 0, this
       compares every removed file with every added file and records those similar enough as renames.  Detecting
       renamed files this way can be expensive. After using this option, hg status -C can be used to check which
       files were identified as moved or renamed. If not specified, -s/--similarity defaults  to  100  and  only
       renames of identical files are detected.

       Examples:

          • A  number  of  files  (bar.c  and  foo.c) are new, while foobar.c has been removed (without using hg
            remove) from the repository:

            $ ls
            bar.c foo.c
            $ hg status
            ! foobar.c
            ? bar.c
            ? foo.c
            $ hg addremove
            adding bar.c
            adding foo.c
            removing foobar.c
            $ hg status
            A bar.c
            A foo.c
            R foobar.c

          • A file foobar.c was moved to foo.c without using hg rename.  Afterwards, it was edited slightly:

            $ ls
            foo.c
            $ hg status
            ! foobar.c
            ? foo.c
            $ hg addremove --similarity 90
            removing foobar.c
            adding foo.c
            recording removal of foobar.c as rename to foo.c (94% similar)
            $ hg status -C
            A foo.c
              foobar.c
            R foobar.c

       Returns 0 if all files are successfully added.

       Options:

       -s,--similarity <SIMILARITY>
              guess renamed files by similarity (0<=s<=100)

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -n, --dry-run
              do not perform actions, just print output

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   annotate
       show changeset information by line for each file:

       hg annotate [-r REV] [-f] [-a] [-u] [-d] [-n] [-c] [-l] FILE...

       List changes in files, showing the revision id responsible for each line.

       This command is useful for discovering when a change was made and by whom.

       If you include --file, --user, or --date, the revision number  is  suppressed  unless  you  also  include
       --number.

       Without  the  -a/--text  option,  annotate  will  avoid  processing  files it detects as binary. With -a,
       annotate will annotate the file anyway,  although  the  results  will  probably  be  neither  useful  nor
       desirable.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
              annotate the specified revision

       --follow
              follow copies/renames and list the filename (DEPRECATED)

       --no-follow
              don't follow copies and renames

       -a, --text
              treat all files as text

       -u, --user
              list the author (long with -v)

       -f, --file
              list the filename

       -d, --date
              list the date (short with -q)

       -n, --number
              list the revision number (default)

       -c, --changeset
              list the changeset

       -l, --line-number
              show line number at the first appearance

       --skip <REV[+]>
              revision to not display (EXPERIMENTAL)

       -w, --ignore-all-space
              ignore white space when comparing lines

       -b, --ignore-space-change
              ignore changes in the amount of white space

       -B, --ignore-blank-lines
              ignore changes whose lines are all blank

       -Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
              ignore changes in whitespace at EOL

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

          aliases: blame

   archive
       create an unversioned archive of a repository revision:

       hg archive [OPTION]... DEST

       By default, the revision used is the parent of the working directory; use -r/--rev to specify a different
       revision.

       The archive type is automatically detected based on file extension (to override, use -t/--type).

       Examples:

       • create a zip file containing the 1.0 release:

         hg archive -r 1.0 project-1.0.zip

       • create a tarball excluding .hg files:

         hg archive project.tar.gz -X ".hg*"

       Valid types are:

       files

              a directory full of files (default)

       tar

              tar archive, uncompressed

       tbz2

              tar archive, compressed using bzip2

       tgz

              tar archive, compressed using gzip

       uzip

              zip archive, uncompressed

       zip

              zip archive, compressed using deflate

       The exact name of the destination archive or directory is given using a format string; see hg help export
       for details.

       Each  member  added  to  an  archive  file has a directory prefix prepended. Use -p/--prefix to specify a
       format string for the prefix. The default is the basename of the archive, with suffixes removed.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       --no-decode
              do not pass files through decoders

       -p,--prefix <PREFIX>
              directory prefix for files in archive

       -r,--rev <REV>
              revision to distribute

       -t,--type <TYPE>
              type of distribution to create

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   backout
       reverse effect of earlier changeset:

       hg backout [OPTION]... [-r] REV

       Prepare a new changeset with the effect of REV undone in the current working directory. If  no  conflicts
       were encountered, it will be committed immediately.

       If REV is the parent of the working directory, then this new changeset is committed automatically (unless
       --no-commit is specified).

       Note   hg backout cannot be used to fix either an unwanted or incorrect merge.

       Examples:

       • Reverse the effect of the parent of the working directory.  This backout will be committed immediately:

         hg backout -r .

       • Reverse the effect of previous bad revision 23:

         hg backout -r 23

       • Reverse the effect of previous bad revision 23 and leave changes uncommitted:

         hg backout -r 23 --no-commit
         hg commit -m "Backout revision 23"

       By default, the pending changeset will have one parent, maintaining a linear history. With  --merge,  the
       pending  changeset will instead have two parents: the old parent of the working directory and a new child
       of REV that simply undoes REV.

       Before version 1.7, the behavior without --merge was equivalent to  specifying  --merge  followed  by  hg
       update --clean . to cancel the merge and leave the child of REV as a head to be merged separately.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       See hg help revert for a way to restore files to the state of another revision.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing to backout or there are unresolved files.

       Options:

       --merge
              merge with old dirstate parent after backout

       --commit
              commit if no conflicts were encountered (DEPRECATED)

       --no-commit
              do not commit

       --parent <REV>
              parent to choose when backing out merge (DEPRECATED)

       -r,--rev <REV>
              revision to backout

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
              specify merge tool

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
              read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
              record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
              record the specified user as committer

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   bisect
       subdivision search of changesets:

       hg bisect [-gbsr] [-U] [-c CMD] [REV]

       This  command  helps to find changesets which introduce problems. To use, mark the earliest changeset you
       know exhibits the problem as bad, then mark the latest changeset which is free from the problem as  good.
       Bisect  will  update your working directory to a revision for testing (unless the -U/--noupdate option is
       specified). Once you have performed tests, mark the working directory as good or  bad,  and  bisect  will
       either update to another candidate changeset or announce that it has found the bad revision.

       As  a shortcut, you can also use the revision argument to mark a revision as good or bad without checking
       it out first.

       If you supply a command, it will be used for automatic bisection.  The environment variable HG_NODE  will
       contain  the  ID  of  the  changeset  being  tested.  The exit status of the command will be used to mark
       revisions as good or bad: status 0 means good, 125 means to skip the revision, 127  (command  not  found)
       will abort the bisection, and any other non-zero exit status means the revision is bad.

       Some examples:

       • start a bisection with known bad revision 34, and good revision 12:

         hg bisect --bad 34
         hg bisect --good 12

       • advance the current bisection by marking current revision as good or bad:

         hg bisect --good
         hg bisect --bad

       • mark  the  current  revision,  or  a known revision, to be skipped (e.g. if that revision is not usable
         because of another issue):

         hg bisect --skip
         hg bisect --skip 23

       • skip all revisions that do not touch directories foo or bar:

         hg bisect --skip "!( file('path:foo') & file('path:bar') )"

       • forget the current bisection:

         hg bisect --reset

       • use 'make && make tests' to automatically find the first broken revision:

         hg bisect --reset
         hg bisect --bad 34
         hg bisect --good 12
         hg bisect --command "make && make tests"

       • see all changesets whose states are already known in the current bisection:

         hg log -r "bisect(pruned)"

       • see the changeset currently being bisected (especially useful if running with -U/--noupdate):

         hg log -r "bisect(current)"

       • see all changesets that took part in the current bisection:

         hg log -r "bisect(range)"

       • you can even get a nice graph:

         hg log --graph -r "bisect(range)"

       See hg help revisions.bisect for more about the bisect() predicate.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r, --reset
              reset bisect state

       -g, --good
              mark changeset good

       -b, --bad
              mark changeset bad

       -s, --skip
              skip testing changeset

       -e, --extend
              extend the bisect range

       -c,--command <CMD>
              use command to check changeset state

       -U, --noupdate
              do not update to target

   bookmarks
       create a new bookmark or list existing bookmarks:

       hg bookmarks [OPTIONS]... [NAME]...

       Bookmarks are labels on changesets to help track lines of development.  Bookmarks are unversioned and can
       be moved, renamed and deleted.  Deleting or moving a bookmark has no effect on the associated changesets.

       Creating  or updating to a bookmark causes it to be marked as 'active'.  The active bookmark is indicated
       with a '*'.  When a commit is made, the active bookmark will advance to  the  new  commit.   A  plain  hg
       update will also advance an active bookmark, if possible.  Updating away from a bookmark will cause it to
       be deactivated.

       Bookmarks can be pushed and pulled between repositories (see hg help push and hg help pull). If a  shared
       bookmark has diverged, a new 'divergent bookmark' of the form 'name@path' will be created. Using hg merge
       will resolve the divergence.

       Specifying bookmark as '.' to -m or -d options is equivalent to specifying the active bookmark's name.

       A bookmark named '@' has the special property that hg clone will check it out by default if it exists.

       Examples:

       • create an active bookmark for a new line of development:

         hg book new-feature

       • create an inactive bookmark as a place marker:

         hg book -i reviewed

       • create an inactive bookmark on another changeset:

         hg book -r .^ tested

       • rename bookmark turkey to dinner:

         hg book -m turkey dinner

       • move the '@' bookmark from another branch:

         hg book -f @

       Options:

       -f, --force
              force

       -r,--rev <REV>
              revision for bookmark action

       -d, --delete
              delete a given bookmark

       -m,--rename <OLD>
              rename a given bookmark

       -i, --inactive
              mark a bookmark inactive

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

              aliases: bookmark

   branch
       set or show the current branch name:

       hg branch [-fC] [NAME]

       Note   Branch names are permanent and global. Use hg bookmark to create a light-weight bookmark  instead.
              See hg help glossary for more information about named branches and bookmarks.

       With  no argument, show the current branch name. With one argument, set the working directory branch name
       (the branch will not exist in the repository until the next commit). Standard  practice  recommends  that
       primary development take place on the 'default' branch.

       Unless -f/--force is specified, branch will not let you set a branch name that already exists.

       Use  -C/--clean  to  reset  the  working directory branch to that of the parent of the working directory,
       negating a previous branch change.

       Use the command hg update to switch to an existing branch. Use  hg  commit  --close-branch to  mark  this
       branch head as closed.  When all heads of a branch are closed, the branch will be considered closed.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -f, --force
              set branch name even if it shadows an existing branch

       -C, --clean
              reset branch name to parent branch name

       -r,--rev <VALUE[+]>
              change branches of the given revs (EXPERIMENTAL)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   branches
       list repository named branches:

       hg branches [-c]

       List  the  repository's  named branches, indicating which ones are inactive. If -c/--closed is specified,
       also list branches which have been marked closed (see hg commit --close-branch).

       Use the command hg update to switch to an existing branch.

       Returns 0.

       Options:

       -a, --active
              show only branches that have unmerged heads (DEPRECATED)

       -c, --closed
              show normal and closed branches

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

   bundle
       create a bundle file:

       hg bundle [-f] [-t BUNDLESPEC] [-a] [-r REV]... [--base REV]... FILE [DEST]

       Generate a bundle file containing data to be added to a repository.

       To create a bundle containing all changesets, use -a/--all (or --base null). Otherwise,  hg  assumes  the
       destination  will  have  all  the nodes you specify with --base parameters. Otherwise, hg will assume the
       repository has all the nodes in destination, or default-push/default if no destination is specified.

       You can change bundle format with the -t/--type option. See hg help bundlespec for documentation on  this
       format. By default, the most appropriate format is used and compression defaults to bzip2.

       The  bundle  file can then be transferred using conventional means and applied to another repository with
       the unbundle or pull command. This is useful when  direct  push  and  pull  are  not  available  or  when
       exporting an entire repository is undesirable.

       Applying  bundles  preserves  all  changeset contents including permissions, copy/rename information, and
       revision history.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if no changes found.

       Options:

       -f, --force
              run even when the destination is unrelated

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              a changeset intended to be added to the destination

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
              a specific branch you would like to bundle

       --base <REV[+]>
              a base changeset assumed to be available at the destination

       -a, --all
              bundle all changesets in the repository

       -t,--type <TYPE>
              bundle compression type to use (default: bzip2)

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
              specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
              specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
              do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   cat
       output the current or given revision of files:

       hg cat [OPTION]... FILE...

       Print the specified files as they were at the given revision. If no revision is given, the parent of  the
       working directory is used.

       Output  may  be  to  a  file,  in  which  case  the  name of the file is given using a format string. The
       formatting rules as follows:

       %%

              literal "%" character

       %s

              basename of file being printed

       %d

              dirname of file being printed, or '.' if in repository root

       %p

              root-relative path name of file being printed

       %H

              changeset hash (40 hexadecimal digits)

       %R

              changeset revision number

       %h

              short-form changeset hash (12 hexadecimal digits)

       %r

              zero-padded changeset revision number

       %b

              basename of the exporting repository

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -o,--output <FORMAT>
              print output to file with formatted name

       -r,--rev <REV>
              print the given revision

       --decode
              apply any matching decode filter

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   clone
       make a copy of an existing repository:

       hg clone [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST]

       Create a copy of an existing repository in a new directory.

       If no destination directory name is specified, it defaults to the basename of the source.

       The location of the source is added to the new repository's .hg/hgrc file, as the default to be used  for
       future pulls.

       Only  local  paths  and  ssh://  URLs  are supported as destinations. For ssh:// destinations, no working
       directory or .hg/hgrc will be created on the remote side.

       If the source repository has a bookmark called '@' set, that revision will be  checked  out  in  the  new
       repository by default.

       To  check  out  a particular version, use -u/--update, or -U/--noupdate to create a clone with no working
       directory.

       To pull only a subset of changesets, specify one or more revisions identifiers with -r/--rev or  branches
       with  -b/--branch.  The  resulting  clone will contain only the specified changesets and their ancestors.
       These options (or 'clone src#rev dest') imply --pull, even for local source repositories.

       In normal clone mode, the remote normalizes repository  data  into  a  common  exchange  format  and  the
       receiving  end  translates  this data into its local storage format. --stream activates a different clone
       mode that essentially copies repository  files  from  the  remote  with  minimal  data  processing.  This
       significantly reduces the CPU cost of a clone both remotely and locally.  However, it often increases the
       transferred data size by 30-40%. This can result in substantially faster clones where I/O  throughput  is
       plentiful,  especially for larger repositories. A side-effect of --stream clones is that storage settings
       and requirements on the remote are applied locally: a modern client may  inherit  legacy  or  inefficient
       storage  used by the remote or a legacy Mercurial client may not be able to clone from a modern Mercurial
       remote.

       Note   Specifying a tag will include the tagged changeset but not the changeset containing the tag.

       For efficiency, hardlinks are used for cloning whenever the  source  and  destination  are  on  the  same
       filesystem  (note  this  applies  only  to  the  repository  data,  not  to  the working directory). Some
       filesystems, such as AFS, implement hardlinking incorrectly, but do not report errors.  In  these  cases,
       use the --pull option to avoid hardlinking.

       Mercurial will update the working directory to the first applicable revision from this list:

       a. null if -U or the source repository has no changesets

       b. if  -u  .  and  the  source  repository  is local, the first parent of the source repository's working
          directory

       c. the changeset specified with -u (if a branch name, this means the latest head of that branch)

       d. the changeset specified with -r

       e. the tipmost head specified with -b

       f. the tipmost head specified with the url#branch source syntax

       g. the revision marked with the '@' bookmark, if present

       h. the tipmost head of the default branch

       i. tip

       When  cloning  from  servers  that  support  it,  Mercurial  may  fetch   pre-generated   data   from   a
       server-advertised  URL.  When  this  is done, hooks operating on incoming changesets and changegroups may
       fire twice, once for the bundle fetched from the URL and another for any additional data not fetched from
       this  URL.  In  addition,  if an error occurs, the repository may be rolled back to a partial clone. This
       behavior may change in future releases. See hg help -e clonebundles for more.

       Examples:

       • clone a remote repository to a new directory named hg/:

         hg clone https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/

       • create a lightweight local clone:

         hg clone project/ project-feature/

       • clone from an absolute path on an ssh server (note double-slash):

         hg clone ssh://user@server//home/projects/alpha/

       • do a streaming clone while checking out a specified version:

         hg clone --stream http://server/repo -u 1.5

       • create a repository without changesets after a particular revision:

         hg clone -r 04e544 experimental/ good/

       • clone (and track) a particular named branch:

         hg clone https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/#stable

       See hg help urls for details on specifying URLs.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -U, --noupdate
              the clone will include an empty working directory (only a repository)

       -u,--updaterev <REV>
              revision, tag, or branch to check out

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              include the specified changeset

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
              clone only the specified branch

       --pull use pull protocol to copy metadata

       --uncompressed
              an alias to --stream (DEPRECATED)

       --stream
              clone with minimal data processing

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
              specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
              specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
              do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   commit
       commit the specified files or all outstanding changes:

       hg commit [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Commit changes to the given files into the repository. Unlike a centralized  SCM,  this  operation  is  a
       local operation. See hg push for a way to actively distribute your changes.

       If a list of files is omitted, all changes reported by hg status will be committed.

       If you are committing the result of a merge, do not provide any filenames or -I/-X filters.

       If no commit message is specified, Mercurial starts your configured editor where you can enter a message.
       In case your commit fails, you will find a backup of your message in .hg/last-message.txt.

       The --close-branch flag can be used to mark the current branch head closed. When all heads  of  a  branch
       are closed, the branch will be considered closed and no longer listed.

       The --amend flag can be used to amend the parent of the working directory with a new commit that contains
       the changes in the parent in addition to those currently reported by hg status, if there are any. The old
       commit  is  stored in a backup bundle in .hg/strip-backup (see hg help bundle and hg help unbundle on how
       to restore it).

       Message, user and date are taken from the amended commit unless specified. When a message isn't specified
       on the command line, the editor will open with the message of the amended commit.

       It is not possible to amend public changesets (see hg help phases) or changesets that have children.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing changed.

       Examples:

       • commit all files ending in .py:

         hg commit --include "set:**.py"

       • commit all non-binary files:

         hg commit --exclude "set:binary()"

       • amend the current commit and set the date to now:

         hg commit --amend --date now

       Options:

       -A, --addremove
              mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing

       --close-branch
              mark a branch head as closed

       --amend
              amend the parent of the working directory

       -s, --secret
              use the secret phase for committing

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -i, --interactive
              use interactive mode

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
              read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
              record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
              record the specified user as committer

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

          aliases: ci

   config
       show combined config settings from all hgrc files:

       hg config [-u] [NAME]...

       With no arguments, print names and values of all config items.

       With one argument of the form section.name, print just the value of that config item.

       With multiple arguments, print names and values of all config items with matching section names.

       With  --edit,  start  an editor on the user-level config file. With --global, edit the system-wide config
       file. With --local, edit the repository-level config file.

       With --debug, the source (filename and line number) is printed for each config item.

       See hg help config for more information about config files.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if NAME does not exist.

       Options:

       -u, --untrusted
              show untrusted configuration options

       -e, --edit
              edit user config

       -l, --local
              edit repository config

       -g, --global
              edit global config

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

              aliases: showconfig debugconfig

   copy
       mark files as copied for the next commit:

       hg copy [OPTION]... [SOURCE]... DEST

       Mark dest as having copies of source files. If dest is a directory, copies are put in that directory.  If
       dest is a file, the source must be a single file.

       By  default, this command copies the contents of files as they exist in the working directory. If invoked
       with -A/--after, the operation is recorded, but no copying is performed.

       This command takes effect with the next commit. To undo a copy before that, see hg revert.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.

       Options:

       -A, --after
              record a copy that has already occurred

       -f, --force
              forcibly copy over an existing managed file

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -n, --dry-run
              do not perform actions, just print output

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

          aliases: cp

   diff
       diff repository (or selected files):

       hg diff [OPTION]... ([-c REV] | [-r REV1 [-r REV2]]) [FILE]...

       Show differences between revisions for the specified files.

       Differences between files are shown using the unified diff format.

       Note   hg diff may generate unexpected results for merges, as it will default to  comparing  against  the
              working directory's first parent changeset if no revisions are specified.

       When  two  revision  arguments  are  given,  then  changes are shown between those revisions. If only one
       revision is specified then that revision is compared to the working directory, and, when no revisions are
       specified, the working directory files are compared to its first parent.

       Alternatively  you  can specify -c/--change with a revision to see the changes in that changeset relative
       to its first parent.

       Without the -a/--text option, diff will avoid generating diffs of files it detects as  binary.  With  -a,
       diff will generate a diff anyway, probably with undesirable results.

       Use  the -g/--git option to generate diffs in the git extended diff format. For more information, read hg
       help diffs.

       Examples:

       • compare a file in the current working directory to its parent:

         hg diff foo.c

       • compare two historical versions of a directory, with rename info:

         hg diff --git -r 1.0:1.2 lib/

       • get change stats relative to the last change on some date:

         hg diff --stat -r "date('may 2')"

       • diff all newly-added files that contain a keyword:

         hg diff "set:added() and grep(GNU)"

       • compare a revision and its parents:

         hg diff -c 9353         # compare against first parent
         hg diff -r 9353^:9353   # same using revset syntax
         hg diff -r 9353^2:9353  # compare against the second parent

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              revision

       -c,--change <REV>
              change made by revision

       -a, --text
              treat all files as text

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       --binary
              generate binary diffs in git mode (default)

       --nodates
              omit dates from diff headers

       --noprefix
              omit a/ and b/ prefixes from filenames

       -p, --show-function
              show which function each change is in

       --reverse
              produce a diff that undoes the changes

       -w, --ignore-all-space
              ignore white space when comparing lines

       -b, --ignore-space-change
              ignore changes in the amount of white space

       -B, --ignore-blank-lines
              ignore changes whose lines are all blank

       -Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
              ignore changes in whitespace at EOL

       -U,--unified <NUM>
              number of lines of context to show

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       --root <DIR>
              produce diffs relative to subdirectory

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   export
       dump the header and diffs for one or more changesets:

       hg export [OPTION]... [-o OUTFILESPEC] [-r] [REV]...

       Print the changeset header and diffs for one or more revisions.  If no revision is given, the  parent  of
       the working directory is used.

       The  information  shown in the changeset header is: author, date, branch name (if non-default), changeset
       hash, parent(s) and commit comment.

       Note   hg export may generate unexpected diff output for merge changesets, as it will compare  the  merge
              changeset against its first parent only.

       Output  may  be  to  a  file,  in  which  case  the  name of the file is given using a format string. The
       formatting rules are as follows:

       %%

              literal "%" character

       %H

              changeset hash (40 hexadecimal digits)

       %N

              number of patches being generated

       %R

              changeset revision number

       %b

              basename of the exporting repository

       %h

              short-form changeset hash (12 hexadecimal digits)

       %m

              first line of the commit message (only alphanumeric characters)

       %n

              zero-padded sequence number, starting at 1

       %r

              zero-padded changeset revision number

       Without the -a/--text option, export will avoid generating diffs of files it detects as binary. With  -a,
       export will generate a diff anyway, probably with undesirable results.

       Use  the  -g/--git  option  to generate diffs in the git extended diff format. See hg help diffs for more
       information.

       With the --switch-parent option, the diff will be against the second parent. It can be useful to review a
       merge.

       Examples:

       • use export and import to transplant a bugfix to the current branch:

         hg export -r 9353 | hg import -

       • export all the changesets between two revisions to a file with rename information:

         hg export --git -r 123:150 > changes.txt

       • split outgoing changes into a series of patches with descriptive names:

         hg export -r "outgoing()" -o "%n-%m.patch"

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -o,--output <FORMAT>
              print output to file with formatted name

       --switch-parent
              diff against the second parent

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              revisions to export

       -a, --text
              treat all files as text

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       --binary
              generate binary diffs in git mode (default)

       --nodates
              omit dates from diff headers

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   files
       list tracked files:

       hg files [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Print  files  under  Mercurial  control  in  the  working directory or specified revision for given files
       (excluding removed files).  Files can be specified as filenames or filesets.

       If no files are given to match, this command prints the names of all files under Mercurial control.

       Examples:

       • list all files under the current directory:

         hg files .

       • shows sizes and flags for current revision:

         hg files -vr .

       • list all files named README:

         hg files -I "**/README"

       • list all binary files:

         hg files "set:binary()"

       • find files containing a regular expression:

         hg files "set:grep('bob')"

       • search tracked file contents with xargs and grep:

         hg files -0 | xargs -0 grep foo

       See hg help patterns and hg help filesets for more information on specifying file patterns.

       Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
              search the repository as it is in REV

       -0, --print0
              end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   forget
       forget the specified files on the next commit:

       hg forget [OPTION]... FILE...

       Mark the specified files so they will no longer be tracked after the next commit.

       This only removes files from the current branch, not from the entire project history,  and  it  does  not
       delete them from the working directory.

       To delete the file from the working directory, see hg remove.

       To undo a forget before the next commit, see hg add.

       Examples:

       • forget newly-added binary files:

         hg forget "set:added() and binary()"

       • forget files that would be excluded by .hgignore:

         hg forget "set:hgignore()"

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   graft
       copy changes from other branches onto the current branch:

       hg graft [OPTION]... [-r REV]... REV...

       This  command uses Mercurial's merge logic to copy individual changes from other branches without merging
       branches in the history graph. This is sometimes known as 'backporting' or 'cherry-picking'. By  default,
       graft will copy user, date, and description from the source changesets.

       Changesets that are ancestors of the current revision, that have already been grafted, or that are merges
       will be skipped.

       If --log is specified, log messages will have a comment appended of the form:

       (grafted from CHANGESETHASH)

       If --force is specified, revisions will be grafted even if they are already ancestors of,  or  have  been
       grafted to, the destination.  This is useful when the revisions have since been backed out.

       If  a graft merge results in conflicts, the graft process is interrupted so that the current merge can be
       manually resolved.  Once all conflicts are addressed,  the  graft  process  can  be  continued  with  the
       -c/--continue option.

       Note   The -c/--continue option does not reapply earlier options, except for --force.

       Examples:

       • copy a single change to the stable branch and edit its description:

         hg update stable
         hg graft --edit 9393

       • graft a range of changesets with one exception, updating dates:

         hg graft -D "2085::2093 and not 2091"

       • continue a graft after resolving conflicts:

         hg graft -c

       • show the source of a grafted changeset:

         hg log --debug -r .

       • show revisions sorted by date:

         hg log -r "sort(all(), date)"

       See hg help revisions for more about specifying revisions.

       Returns 0 on successful completion.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              revisions to graft

       -c, --continue
              resume interrupted graft

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       --log  append graft info to log message

       -f, --force
              force graft

       -D, --currentdate
              record the current date as commit date

       -U, --currentuser
              record the current user as committer

       -d,--date <DATE>
              record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
              record the specified user as committer

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
              specify merge tool

       -n, --dry-run
              do not perform actions, just print output

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   grep
       search revision history for a pattern in specified files:

       hg grep [OPTION]... PATTERN [FILE]...

       Search revision history for a regular expression in the specified files or the entire project.

       By  default,  grep prints the most recent revision number for each file in which it finds a match. To get
       it to print every revision that contains a change in match  status  ("-"  for  a  match  that  becomes  a
       non-match, or "+" for a non-match that becomes a match), use the --all flag.

       PATTERN can be any Python (roughly Perl-compatible) regular expression.

       If  no  FILEs  are  specified  (and  -f/--follow  isn't  set),  all files in the repository are searched,
       including those that don't exist in the current branch or have been deleted in a prior changeset.

       Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise.

       Options:

       -0, --print0
              end fields with NUL

       --all  print all revisions that match

       -a, --text
              treat all files as text

       -f, --follow
              follow changeset history, or file history across copies and renames

       -i, --ignore-case
              ignore case when matching

       -l, --files-with-matches
              print only filenames and revisions that match

       -n, --line-number
              print matching line numbers

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              only search files changed within revision range

       -u, --user
              list the author (long with -v)

       -d, --date
              list the date (short with -q)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   heads
       show branch heads:

       hg heads [-ct] [-r STARTREV] [REV]...

       With no arguments, show all open branch heads in the repository.  Branch heads are changesets  that  have
       no  descendants  on  the  same branch. They are where development generally takes place and are the usual
       targets for update and merge operations.

       If one or more REVs are given, only open branch heads on  the  branches  associated  with  the  specified
       changesets  are  shown.  This  means  that  you  can  use  hg  heads  . to see the heads on the currently
       checked-out branch.

       If -c/--closed is specified, also show branch heads marked closed (see hg commit --close-branch).

       If STARTREV is specified, only those heads that are descendants of STARTREV will be displayed.

       If -t/--topo is specified, named branch mechanics will be ignored and only topological heads  (changesets
       with no children) will be shown.

       Returns 0 if matching heads are found, 1 if not.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <STARTREV>
              show only heads which are descendants of STARTREV

       -t, --topo
              show topological heads only

       -a, --active
              show active branchheads only (DEPRECATED)

       -c, --closed
              show normal and closed branch heads

       --style <STYLE>
              display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template

   help
       show help for a given topic or a help overview:

       hg help [-ecks] [TOPIC]

       With no arguments, print a list of commands with short help messages.

       Given a topic, extension, or command name, print help for that topic.

       Returns 0 if successful.

       Options:

       -e, --extension
              show only help for extensions

       -c, --command
              show only help for commands

       -k, --keyword
              show topics matching keyword

       -s,--system <VALUE[+]>
              show help for specific platform(s)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   identify
       identify the working directory or specified revision:

       hg identify [-nibtB] [-r REV] [SOURCE]

       Print  a  summary  identifying  the  repository  state  at  REV using one or two parent hash identifiers,
       followed by a "+" if the working directory has uncommitted changes, the branch name (if not  default),  a
       list of tags, and a list of bookmarks.

       When  REV  is  not  given,  print  a summary of the current state of the repository including the working
       directory. Specify -r. to get information of the working directory parent  without  scanning  uncommitted
       changes.

       Specifying  a  path  to  a  repository  root  or  Mercurial  bundle  will cause lookup to operate on that
       repository/bundle.

       Examples:

       • generate a build identifier for the working directory:

         hg id --id > build-id.dat

       • find the revision corresponding to a tag:

         hg id -n -r 1.3

       • check the most recent revision of a remote repository:

         hg id -r tip https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/

       See hg log for generating more information about specific revisions, including full hash identifiers.

       Returns 0 if successful.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
              identify the specified revision

       -n, --num
              show local revision number

       -i, --id
              show global revision id

       -b, --branch
              show branch

       -t, --tags
              show tags

       -B, --bookmarks
              show bookmarks

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
              specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
              specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
              do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

              aliases: id

   import
       import an ordered set of patches:

       hg import [OPTION]... PATCH...

       Import a list of patches and commit them individually (unless --no-commit is specified).

       To read a patch from standard input (stdin), use "-" as the patch name. If a URL is specified, the  patch
       will be downloaded from there.

       Import  first  applies changes to the working directory (unless --bypass is specified), import will abort
       if there are outstanding changes.

       Use --bypass to apply and commit patches directly  to  the  repository,  without  affecting  the  working
       directory. Without --exact, patches will be applied on top of the working directory parent revision.

       You  can  import  a patch straight from a mail message. Even patches as attachments work (to use the body
       part, it must have type text/plain or text/x-patch). From and Subject headers of email message  are  used
       as  default  committer  and  commit message. All text/plain body parts before first diff are added to the
       commit message.

       If the imported patch was generated by hg export, user and description from patch  override  values  from
       message headers and body. Values given on command line with -m/--message and -u/--user override these.

       If  --exact  is  specified,  import  will  set  the  working directory to the parent of each patch before
       applying it, and will abort if the resulting changeset has a different ID than the one  recorded  in  the
       patch.  This  will  guard against various ways that portable patch formats and mail systems might fail to
       transfer Mercurial data or metadata. See hg bundle for lossless transmission.

       Use --partial to ensure a changeset will be created from the patch even if  some  hunks  fail  to  apply.
       Hunks  that  fail to apply will be written to a <target-file>.rej file. Conflicts can then be resolved by
       hand before hg commit --amend is run to update the created changeset. This  flag  exists  to  let  people
       import  patches  that  partially apply without losing the associated metadata (author, date, description,
       ...).

       Note   When no hunks apply cleanly, hg import --partial will create an empty  changeset,  importing  only
              the patch metadata.

       With  -s/--similarity,  hg will attempt to discover renames and copies in the patch in the same way as hg
       addremove.

       It is possible to use external patch programs to perform the patch by setting the ui.patch  configuration
       option.  For  the  default  internal  tool,  the fuzz can also be configured via patch.fuzz.  See hg help
       config for more information about configuration files and how to use these options.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       Examples:

       • import a traditional patch from a website and detect renames:

         hg import -s 80 http://example.com/bugfix.patch

       • import a changeset from an hgweb server:

         hg import https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/rev/5ca8c111e9aa

       • import all the patches in an Unix-style mbox:

         hg import incoming-patches.mbox

       • import patches from stdin:

         hg import -

       • attempt to exactly restore an exported changeset (not always possible):

         hg import --exact proposed-fix.patch

       • use an external tool to apply a patch which is too fuzzy for the default internal tool.

            hg import --config ui.patch="patch --merge" fuzzy.patch

       • change the default fuzzing from 2 to a less strict 7

            hg import --config ui.fuzz=7 fuzz.patch

       Returns 0 on success, 1 on partial success (see --partial).

       Options:

       -p,--strip <NUM>
              directory strip option for patch. This has the same meaning  as  the  corresponding  patch  option
              (default: 1)

       -b,--base <PATH>
              base path (DEPRECATED)

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -f, --force
              skip check for outstanding uncommitted changes (DEPRECATED)

       --no-commit
              don't commit, just update the working directory

       --bypass
              apply patch without touching the working directory

       --partial
              commit even if some hunks fail

       --exact
              abort if patch would apply lossily

       --prefix <DIR>
              apply patch to subdirectory

       --import-branch
              use any branch information in patch (implied by --exact)

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
              read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
              record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
              record the specified user as committer

       -s,--similarity <SIMILARITY>
              guess renamed files by similarity (0<=s<=100)

              aliases: patch

   incoming
       show new changesets found in source:

       hg incoming [-p] [-n] [-M] [-f] [-r REV]... [--bundle FILENAME] [SOURCE]

       Show  new  changesets  found  in  the  specified  path/URL  or  the  default pull location. These are the
       changesets that would have been pulled by hg pull at the time you issued this command.

       See pull for valid source format details.

       With -B/--bookmarks, the  result  of  bookmark  comparison  between  local  and  remote  repositories  is
       displayed. With -v/--verbose, status is also displayed for each bookmark like below:

       BM1               01234567890a added
       BM2               1234567890ab advanced
       BM3               234567890abc diverged
       BM4               34567890abcd changed

       The action taken locally when pulling depends on the status of each bookmark:

       added

              pull will create it

       advanced

              pull will update it

       diverged

              pull will create a divergent bookmark

       changed

              result depends on remote changesets

       From  the  point of view of pulling behavior, bookmark existing only in the remote repository are treated
       as added, even if it is in fact locally deleted.

       For remote repository, using --bundle avoids downloading the changesets twice if the incoming is followed
       by a pull.

       Examples:

       • show incoming changes with patches and full description:

         hg incoming -vp

       • show incoming changes excluding merges, store a bundle:

         hg in -vpM --bundle incoming.hg
         hg pull incoming.hg

       • briefly list changes inside a bundle:

         hg in changes.hg -T "{desc|firstline}\n"

       Returns 0 if there are incoming changes, 1 otherwise.

       Options:

       -f, --force
              run even if remote repository is unrelated

       -n, --newest-first
              show newest record first

       --bundle <FILE>
              file to store the bundles into

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              a remote changeset intended to be added

       -B, --bookmarks
              compare bookmarks

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
              a specific branch you would like to pull

       -p, --patch
              show patch

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       -l,--limit <NUM>
              limit number of changes displayed

       -M, --no-merges
              do not show merges

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       -G, --graph
              show the revision DAG

       --style <STYLE>
              display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
              specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
              specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
              do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

          aliases: in

   init
       create a new repository in the given directory:

       hg init [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [DEST]

       Initialize  a  new  repository  in the given directory. If the given directory does not exist, it will be
       created.

       If no directory is given, the current directory is used.

       It is possible to specify an ssh:// URL as the destination.  See hg help urls for more information.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
              specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
              specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
              do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

   locate
       locate files matching specific patterns (DEPRECATED):

       hg locate [OPTION]... [PATTERN]...

       Print files under Mercurial control in the working directory whose names match the given patterns.

       By default, this command searches all directories in the working directory. To search  just  the  current
       directory and its subdirectories, use "--include .".

       If  no patterns are given to match, this command prints the names of all files under Mercurial control in
       the working directory.

       If you want to feed the output of this command into the "xargs" command, use the -0 option to  both  this
       command  and  "xargs".  This  will  avoid  the  problem of "xargs" treating single filenames that contain
       whitespace as multiple filenames.

       See hg help files for a more versatile command.

       Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
              search the repository as it is in REV

       -0, --print0
              end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs

       -f, --fullpath
              print complete paths from the filesystem root

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   log
       show revision history of entire repository or files:

       hg log [OPTION]... [FILE]

       Print the revision history of the specified files or the entire project.

       If no revision range is specified, the default is tip:0 unless --follow is set, in which case the working
       directory parent is used as the starting revision.

       File  history is shown without following rename or copy history of files. Use -f/--follow with a filename
       to follow history across renames and copies. --follow without a filename will only show ancestors of  the
       starting revision.

       By  default  this  command prints revision number and changeset id, tags, non-trivial parents, user, date
       and time, and a summary for each commit. When the -v/--verbose switch is used, the list of changed  files
       and full commit message are shown.

       With  --graph the revisions are shown as an ASCII art DAG with the most recent changeset at the top.  'o'
       is a changeset, '@' is a working directory parent, '_' closes a branch, 'x' is obsolete, '*' is unstable,
       and  '+'  represents  a fork where the changeset from the lines below is a parent of the 'o' merge on the
       same line.  Paths in the DAG are represented with '|', '/' and so forth. ':' in place of a '|'  indicates
       one or more revisions in a path are omitted.

       Use  -L/--line-range FILE,M:N options to follow the history of lines from M to N in FILE. With -p/--patch
       only diff hunks affecting specified line range will be shown. This option requires --follow;  it  can  be
       specified  multiple  times.  Currently,  this  option  is  not  compatible  with  --graph. This option is
       experimental.

       Note   hg log --patch may generate unexpected diff output for merge changesets, as it will  only  compare
              the  merge  changeset  against its first parent. Also, only files different from BOTH parents will
              appear in files:.

       Note   For performance reasons, hg log FILE may omit duplicate changes made on branches and will not show
              removals or mode changes. To see all such changes, use the --removed switch.

       Note   The  history  resulting  from  -L/--line-range  options  depends  on diff options; for instance if
              white-spaces are ignored, respective changes with only white-spaces in specified line  range  will
              not be listed.

       Some examples:

       • changesets with full descriptions and file lists:

         hg log -v

       • changesets ancestral to the working directory:

         hg log -f

       • last 10 commits on the current branch:

         hg log -l 10 -b .

       • changesets showing all modifications of a file, including removals:

         hg log --removed file.c

       • all changesets that touch a directory, with diffs, excluding merges:

         hg log -Mp lib/

       • all revision numbers that match a keyword:

         hg log -k bug --template "{rev}\n"

       • the full hash identifier of the working directory parent:

         hg log -r . --template "{node}\n"

       • list available log templates:

         hg log -T list

       • check if a given changeset is included in a tagged release:

         hg log -r "a21ccf and ancestor(1.9)"

       • find all changesets by some user in a date range:

         hg log -k alice -d "may 2008 to jul 2008"

       • summary of all changesets after the last tag:

         hg log -r "last(tagged())::" --template "{desc|firstline}\n"

       • changesets touching lines 13 to 23 for file.c:

         hg log -L file.c,13:23

       • changesets touching lines 13 to 23 for file.c and lines 2 to 6 of main.c with patch:

         hg log -L file.c,13:23 -L main.c,2:6 -p

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       See hg help revisions for more about specifying and ordering revisions.

       See  hg  help  templates for  more about pre-packaged styles and specifying custom templates. The default
       template used by the log command can be customized via the ui.logtemplate configuration setting.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -f, --follow
              follow changeset history, or file history across copies and renames

       --follow-first
              only follow the first parent of merge changesets (DEPRECATED)

       -d,--date <DATE>
              show revisions matching date spec

       -C, --copies
              show copied files

       -k,--keyword <TEXT[+]>
              do case-insensitive search for a given text

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              show the specified revision or revset

       -L,--line-range <FILE,RANGE[+]>
              follow line range of specified file (EXPERIMENTAL)

       --removed
              include revisions where files were removed

       -m, --only-merges
              show only merges (DEPRECATED)

       -u,--user <USER[+]>
              revisions committed by user

       --only-branch <BRANCH[+]>
              show only changesets within the given named branch (DEPRECATED)

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
              show changesets within the given named branch

       -P,--prune <REV[+]>
              do not display revision or any of its ancestors

       -p, --patch
              show patch

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       -l,--limit <NUM>
              limit number of changes displayed

       -M, --no-merges
              do not show merges

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       -G, --graph
              show the revision DAG

       --style <STYLE>
              display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

          aliases: history

   manifest
       output the current or given revision of the project manifest:

       hg manifest [-r REV]

       Print a list of version controlled files for the given revision.  If no  revision  is  given,  the  first
       parent of the working directory is used, or the null revision if no revision is checked out.

       With -v, print file permissions, symlink and executable bits.  With --debug, print file revision hashes.

       If  option --all is specified, the list of all files from all revisions is printed. This includes deleted
       and renamed files.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
              revision to display

       --all  list files from all revisions

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

   merge
       merge another revision into working directory:

       hg merge [-P] [[-r] REV]

       The current working directory is updated with all changes made in the requested revision since  the  last
       common predecessor revision.

       Files  that  changed between either parent are marked as changed for the next commit and a commit must be
       performed before any further updates to the repository  are  allowed.  The  next  commit  will  have  two
       parents.

       --tool  can  be used to specify the merge tool used for file merges. It overrides the HGMERGE environment
       variable and your configuration files. See hg help merge-tools for options.

       If no revision is specified, the working directory's parent is a head revision, and  the  current  branch
       contains  exactly  one  other  head,  the  other  head  is merged with by default. Otherwise, an explicit
       revision with which to merge with must be provided.

       See hg help resolve for information on handling file conflicts.

       To undo an uncommitted merge, use hg merge --abort which will check out a  clean  copy  of  the  original
       merge parent, losing all changes.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if there are unresolved files.

       Options:

       -f, --force
              force a merge including outstanding changes (DEPRECATED)

       -r,--rev <REV>
              revision to merge

       -P, --preview
              review revisions to merge (no merge is performed)

       --abort
              abort the ongoing merge

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
              specify merge tool

   outgoing
       show changesets not found in the destination:

       hg outgoing [-M] [-p] [-n] [-f] [-r REV]... [DEST]

       Show changesets not found in the specified destination repository or the default push location. These are
       the changesets that would be pushed if a push was requested.

       See pull for details of valid destination formats.

       With -B/--bookmarks, the  result  of  bookmark  comparison  between  local  and  remote  repositories  is
       displayed. With -v/--verbose, status is also displayed for each bookmark like below:

       BM1               01234567890a added
       BM2                            deleted
       BM3               234567890abc advanced
       BM4               34567890abcd diverged
       BM5               4567890abcde changed

       The action taken when pushing depends on the status of each bookmark:

       added

              push with -B will create it

       deleted

              push with -B will delete it

       advanced

              push will update it

       diverged

              push with -B will update it

       changed

              push with -B will update it

       From  the point of view of pushing behavior, bookmarks existing only in the remote repository are treated
       as deleted, even if it is in fact added remotely.

       Returns 0 if there are outgoing changes, 1 otherwise.

       Options:

       -f, --force
              run even when the destination is unrelated

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              a changeset intended to be included in the destination

       -n, --newest-first
              show newest record first

       -B, --bookmarks
              compare bookmarks

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
              a specific branch you would like to push

       -p, --patch
              show patch

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       -l,--limit <NUM>
              limit number of changes displayed

       -M, --no-merges
              do not show merges

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       -G, --graph
              show the revision DAG

       --style <STYLE>
              display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
              specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
              specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
              do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

          aliases: out

   parents
       show the parents of the working directory or revision (DEPRECATED):

       hg parents [-r REV] [FILE]

       Print the working directory's parent revisions. If a revision is given via -r/--rev, the parent  of  that
       revision  will  be printed.  If a file argument is given, the revision in which the file was last changed
       (before the working directory revision or the argument to --rev if given) is printed.

       This command is equivalent to:

       hg log -r "p1()+p2()" or
       hg log -r "p1(REV)+p2(REV)" or
       hg log -r "max(::p1() and file(FILE))+max(::p2() and file(FILE))" or
       hg log -r "max(::p1(REV) and file(FILE))+max(::p2(REV) and file(FILE))"

       See hg summary and hg help revsets for related information.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
              show parents of the specified revision

       --style <STYLE>
              display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template

   paths
       show aliases for remote repositories:

       hg paths [NAME]

       Show definition of symbolic path name NAME. If no name is given, show definition of all available names.

       Option -q/--quiet suppresses all output when searching for NAME  and  shows  only  the  path  names  when
       listing all definitions.

       Path  names  are defined in the [paths] section of your configuration file and in /etc/mercurial/hgrc. If
       run inside a repository, .hg/hgrc is used, too.

       The path names default and default-push  have  a  special  meaning.   When  performing  a  push  or  pull
       operation, they are used as fallbacks if no location is specified on the command-line.  When default-push
       is set, it will be used for push and default will be used for pull; otherwise  default  is  used  as  the
       fallback for both.  When cloning a repository, the clone source is written as default in .hg/hgrc.

       Note   default  and default-push apply to all inbound (e.g.  hg incoming) and outbound (e.g. hg outgoing,
              hg email and hg bundle) operations.

       See hg help urls for more information.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

   phase
       set or show the current phase name:

       hg phase [-p|-d|-s] [-f] [-r] [REV...]

       With no argument, show the phase name of the current revision(s).

       With one of -p/--public, -d/--draft or -s/--secret, change the phase value of the specified revisions.

       Unless -f/--force is specified, hg phase won't move changesets from a lower  phase  to  a  higher  phase.
       Phases are ordered as follows:

       public < draft < secret

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if some phases could not be changed.

       (For more information about the phases concept, see hg help phases.)

       Options:

       -p, --public
              set changeset phase to public

       -d, --draft
              set changeset phase to draft

       -s, --secret
              set changeset phase to secret

       -f, --force
              allow to move boundary backward

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              target revision

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   pull
       pull changes from the specified source:

       hg pull [-u] [-f] [-r REV]... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [SOURCE]

       Pull changes from a remote repository to a local one.

       This  finds  all  changes  from  the  repository  at  the  specified path or URL and adds them to a local
       repository (the current one unless -R is specified). By default, this does not update  the  copy  of  the
       project in the working directory.

       Use  hg  incoming if  you  want  to  see what would have been added by a pull at the time you issued this
       command. If you then decide to add those changes to the repository, you should use hg pull -r  X where  X
       is the last changeset listed by hg incoming.

       If SOURCE is omitted, the 'default' path will be used.  See hg help urls for more information.

       Specifying bookmark as . is equivalent to specifying the active bookmark's name.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if an update had unresolved files.

       Options:

       -u, --update
              update to new branch head if new descendants were pulled

       -f, --force
              run even when remote repository is unrelated

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              a remote changeset intended to be added

       -B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]>
              bookmark to pull

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
              a specific branch you would like to pull

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
              specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
              specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
              do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   push
       push changes to the specified destination:

       hg push [-f] [-r REV]... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [DEST]

       Push changesets from the local repository to the specified destination.

       This  operation  is symmetrical to pull: it is identical to a pull in the destination repository from the
       current one.

       By default, push will not allow creation of new heads at the destination, since multiple heads would make
       it unclear which head to use. In this situation, it is recommended to pull and merge before pushing.

       Use  --new-branch  if  you  want  to  allow  push to create a new named branch that is not present at the
       destination. This allows you to only create a new branch without forcing other changes.

       Note   Extra care should be taken with the -f/--force option, which  will  push  all  new  heads  on  all
              branches, an action which will almost always cause confusion for collaborators.

       If  -r/--rev  is  used,  the  specified  revision  and  all  its  ancestors  will be pushed to the remote
       repository.

       If -B/--bookmark is used, the specified bookmarked revision, its ancestors,  and  the  bookmark  will  be
       pushed to the remote repository. Specifying . is equivalent to specifying the active bookmark's name.

       Please  see  hg  help  urls for important details about ssh:// URLs. If DESTINATION is omitted, a default
       path will be used.

       The --pushvars option sends strings to the  server  that  become  environment  variables  prepended  with
       HG_USERVAR_.   For   example,  --pushvars  ENABLE_FEATURE=true,  provides  the  server  side  hooks  with
       HG_USERVAR_ENABLE_FEATURE=true as part of their environment.

       pushvars can provide for user-overridable hooks as well as set debug levels. One example is having a hook
       that blocks commits containing conflict markers, but enables the user to override the hook if the file is
       using conflict markers for testing purposes or the file  format  has  strings  that  look  like  conflict
       markers.

       By default, servers will ignore --pushvars. To enable it add the following to your configuration file:

       [push]
       pushvars.server = true

       Returns 0 if push was successful, 1 if nothing to push.

       Options:

       -f, --force
              force push

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              a changeset intended to be included in the destination

       -B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]>
              bookmark to push

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
              a specific branch you would like to push

       --new-branch
              allow pushing a new branch

       --pushvars <VALUE[+]>
              variables that can be sent to server (ADVANCED)

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
              specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
              specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
              do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   recover
       roll back an interrupted transaction:

       hg recover

       Recover from an interrupted commit or pull.

       This  command  tries  to  fix  the  repository  status  after an interrupted operation. It should only be
       necessary when Mercurial suggests it.

       Returns 0 if successful, 1 if nothing to recover or verify fails.

   remove
       remove the specified files on the next commit:

       hg remove [OPTION]... FILE...

       Schedule the indicated files for removal from the current branch.

       This command schedules the files to be removed at the next commit.  To undo a remove before that, see  hg
       revert. To undo added files, see hg forget.

       -A/--after  can  be  used  to remove only files that have already been deleted, -f/--force can be used to
       force deletion, and -Af can be used to remove files from the next revision without deleting them from the
       working directory.

       The  following  table  details  the  behavior  of  remove  for different file states (columns) and option
       combinations (rows). The file states are Added [A], Clean [C], Modified [M] and Missing [!]  (as reported
       by hg status). The actions are Warn, Remove (from branch) and Delete (from disk):

                                             ┌──────────┬───┬────┬────┬───┐
                                             │opt/state │ A │ C  │ M  │ ! │
                                             ├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
                                             │none      │ W │ RD │ W  │ R │
                                             ├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
                                             │-f        │ R │ RD │ RD │ R │
                                             ├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
                                             │-A        │ W │ W  │ W  │ R │
                                             ├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤
                                             │-Af       │ R │ R  │ R  │ R │
                                             └──────────┴───┴────┴────┴───┘

       Note   hg  remove never  deletes files in Added [A] state from the working directory, not even if --force
              is specified.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if any warnings encountered.

       Options:

       -A, --after
              record delete for missing files

       -f, --force
              forget added files, delete modified files

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

          aliases: rm

   rename
       rename files; equivalent of copy + remove:

       hg rename [OPTION]... SOURCE... DEST

       Mark dest as copies of sources; mark sources for deletion. If dest is a directory, copies are put in that
       directory. If dest is a file, there can only be one source.

       By  default, this command copies the contents of files as they exist in the working directory. If invoked
       with -A/--after, the operation is recorded, but no copying is performed.

       This command takes effect at the next commit. To undo a rename before that, see hg revert.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.

       Options:

       -A, --after
              record a rename that has already occurred

       -f, --force
              forcibly copy over an existing managed file

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -n, --dry-run
              do not perform actions, just print output

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

          aliases: move mv

   resolve
       redo merges or set/view the merge status of files:

       hg resolve [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Merges with unresolved conflicts are often the result of non-interactive merging using the internal:merge
       configuration setting, or a command-line merge tool like diff3. The resolve command is used to manage the
       files involved in a merge, after hg merge has been run, and before hg commit is  run  (i.e.  the  working
       directory must have two parents). See hg help merge-tools for information on configuring merge tools.

       The resolve command can be used in the following ways:

       • hg  resolve  [--tool  TOOL]  FILE...:  attempt to re-merge the specified files, discarding any previous
         merge attempts. Re-merging is not performed for files already  marked  as  resolved.  Use  --all/-a  to
         select  all unresolved files. --tool can be used to specify the merge tool used for the given files. It
         overrides the HGMERGE environment variable and your configuration files.  Previous  file  contents  are
         saved with a .orig suffix.

       • hg  resolve  -m  [FILE]:  mark  a file as having been resolved (e.g. after having manually fixed-up the
         files). The default is to mark all unresolved files.

       • hg resolve -u [FILE]...: mark a file as unresolved. The default is to mark all resolved files.

       • hg resolve -l: list files which had or still have conflicts.  In the printed list, U = unresolved and R
         =  resolved.   You  can use set:unresolved() or set:resolved() to filter the list. See hg help filesets
         for details.

       Note   Mercurial will not let you commit files with unresolved merge conflicts. You must use  hg  resolve
              -m ... before you can commit after a conflicting merge.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if any files fail a resolve attempt.

       Options:

       -a, --all
              select all unresolved files

       -l, --list
              list state of files needing merge

       -m, --mark
              mark files as resolved

       -u, --unmark
              mark files as unresolved

       -n, --no-status
              hide status prefix

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
              specify merge tool

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   revert
       restore files to their checkout state:

       hg revert [OPTION]... [-r REV] [NAME]...

       Note   To check out earlier revisions, you should use hg update REV.  To cancel an uncommitted merge (and
              lose your changes), use hg merge --abort.

       With no revision specified, revert the specified files or directories to the contents  they  had  in  the
       parent  of  the  working  directory.   This  restores  the  contents  of files to an unmodified state and
       unschedules adds, removes, copies, and renames. If the  working  directory  has  two  parents,  you  must
       explicitly specify a revision.

       Using  the  -r/--rev  or -d/--date options, revert the given files or directories to their states as of a
       specific revision. Because revert does not change the working directory parents, this  will  cause  these
       files  to  appear  modified.  This  can be helpful to "back out" some or all of an earlier change. See hg
       backout for a related method.

       Modified files are  saved  with  a  .orig  suffix  before  reverting.   To  disable  these  backups,  use
       --no-backup.  It  is possible to store the backup files in a custom directory relative to the root of the
       repository by setting the ui.origbackuppath configuration option.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       See hg help backout for a way to reverse the effect of an earlier changeset.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -a, --all
              revert all changes when no arguments given

       -d,--date <DATE>
              tipmost revision matching date

       -r,--rev <REV>
              revert to the specified revision

       -C, --no-backup
              do not save backup copies of files

       -i, --interactive
              interactively select the changes

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -n, --dry-run
              do not perform actions, just print output

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   rollback
       roll back the last transaction (DANGEROUS) (DEPRECATED):

       hg rollback

       Please use hg commit --amend instead of rollback to correct mistakes in the last commit.

       This command should be used with care. There is only one level of rollback, and there is no way to undo a
       rollback.  It  will  also  restore  the dirstate at the time of the last transaction, losing any dirstate
       changes since that time. This command does not alter the working directory.

       Transactions are used to encapsulate the effects of all commands that create new changesets or  propagate
       existing changesets into a repository.

       For example, the following commands are transactional, and their effects can be rolled back:

       • commit

       • import

       • pull

       • push (with this repository as the destination)

       • unbundle

       To  avoid  permanent data loss, rollback will refuse to rollback a commit transaction if it isn't checked
       out. Use --force to override this protection.

       The rollback command can be entirely disabled by setting the ui.rollback configuration setting to  false.
       If  you're  here  because  you  want  to use rollback and it's disabled, you can re-enable the command by
       setting ui.rollback to true.

       This command is not intended for use on public repositories. Once changes are visible for pull  by  other
       users,  rolling  a  transaction  back  locally  is  ineffective (someone else may already have pulled the
       changes). Furthermore, a race is possible with readers of the repository; for example an in-progress pull
       from the repository may fail if a rollback is performed.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if no rollback data is available.

       Options:

       -n, --dry-run
              do not perform actions, just print output

       -f, --force
              ignore safety measures

   root
       print the root (top) of the current working directory:

       hg root

       Print the root directory of the current repository.

       Returns 0 on success.

   serve
       start stand-alone webserver:

       hg serve [OPTION]...

       Start  a  local HTTP repository browser and pull server. You can use this for ad-hoc sharing and browsing
       of repositories. It is recommended to use a real web server to serve a repository for longer  periods  of
       time.

       Please  note that the server does not implement access control.  This means that, by default, anybody can
       read from the server and nobody can write to it by default. Set the web.allow-push option to *  to  allow
       everybody to push to the server. You should use a real web server if you need to authenticate users.

       By  default,  the  server  logs  accesses  to  stdout  and  errors  to stderr. Use the -A/--accesslog and
       -E/--errorlog options to log to files.

       To have the server choose a free port number to listen on, specify a port number of 0; in this case,  the
       server will print the port number it uses.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -A,--accesslog <FILE>
              name of access log file to write to

       -d, --daemon
              run server in background

       --daemon-postexec <VALUE[+]>
              used internally by daemon mode

       -E,--errorlog <FILE>
              name of error log file to write to

       -p,--port <PORT>
              port to listen on (default: 8000)

       -a,--address <ADDR>
              address to listen on (default: all interfaces)

       --prefix <PREFIX>
              prefix path to serve from (default: server root)

       -n,--name <NAME>
              name to show in web pages (default: working directory)

       --web-conf <FILE>
              name of the hgweb config file (see 'hg help hgweb')

       --webdir-conf <FILE>
              name of the hgweb config file (DEPRECATED)

       --pid-file <FILE>
              name of file to write process ID to

       --stdio
              for remote clients (ADVANCED)

       --cmdserver <MODE>
              for remote clients (ADVANCED)

       -t,--templates <TEMPLATE>
              web templates to use

       --style <STYLE>
              template style to use

       -6, --ipv6
              use IPv6 in addition to IPv4

       --certificate <FILE>
              SSL certificate file

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   status
       show changed files in the working directory:

       hg status [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Show  status  of files in the repository. If names are given, only files that match are shown. Files that
       are clean or ignored or  the  source  of  a  copy/move  operation,  are  not  listed  unless  -c/--clean,
       -i/--ignored,  -C/--copies  or  -A/--all  are  given.   Unless options described with "show only ..." are
       given, the options -mardu are used.

       Option  -q/--quiet  hides  untracked  (unknown  and  ignored)  files  unless  explicitly  requested  with
       -u/--unknown or -i/--ignored.

       Note   hg  status may  appear  to disagree with diff if permissions have changed or a merge has occurred.
              The standard diff format does not report permission changes and diff only reports changes relative
              to one merge parent.

       If  one  revision is given, it is used as the base revision.  If two revisions are given, the differences
       between them are shown. The --change option can also be used as a shortcut to list the changed files of a
       revision from its first parent.

       The codes used to show the status of files are:

       M = modified
       A = added
       R = removed
       C = clean
       ! = missing (deleted by non-hg command, but still tracked)
       ? = not tracked
       I = ignored
         = origin of the previous file (with --copies)

       The  -t/--terse  option  abbreviates the output by showing only the directory name if all the files in it
       share the same status. The option takes an argument  indicating  the  statuses  to  abbreviate:  'm'  for
       'modified',  'a'  for 'added', 'r' for 'removed', 'd' for 'deleted', 'u' for 'unknown', 'i' for 'ignored'
       and 'c' for clean.

       It abbreviates only those statuses which are passed. Note that clean and ignored files are not  displayed
       with '--terse ic' unless the -c/--clean and -i/--ignored options are also used.

       The  -v/--verbose  option shows information when the repository is in an unfinished merge, shelve, rebase
       state etc. You can have this behavior turned  on  by  default  by  enabling  the  commands.status.verbose
       option.

       You  can  skip  displaying  some of these states by setting commands.status.skipstates to one or more of:
       'bisect', 'graft', 'histedit', 'merge', 'rebase', or 'unshelve'.

       Examples:

       • show changes in the working directory relative to a changeset:

         hg status --rev 9353

       • show changes in the working directory relative to the current directory (see hg help patterns for  more
         information):

         hg status re:

       • show all changes including copies in an existing changeset:

         hg status --copies --change 9353

       • get a NUL separated list of added files, suitable for xargs:

         hg status -an0

       • show  more information about the repository status, abbreviating added, removed, modified, deleted, and
         untracked paths:

         hg status -v -t mardu

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -A, --all
              show status of all files

       -m, --modified
              show only modified files

       -a, --added
              show only added files

       -r, --removed
              show only removed files

       -d, --deleted
              show only deleted (but tracked) files

       -c, --clean
              show only files without changes

       -u, --unknown
              show only unknown (not tracked) files

       -i, --ignored
              show only ignored files

       -n, --no-status
              hide status prefix

       -t,--terse <VALUE>
              show the terse output (EXPERIMENTAL)

       -C, --copies
              show source of copied files

       -0, --print0
              end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs

       --rev <REV[+]>
              show difference from revision

       --change <REV>
              list the changed files of a revision

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

          aliases: st

   summary
       summarize working directory state:

       hg summary [--remote]

       This generates a brief summary of the working directory state, including parents, branch, commit  status,
       phase and available updates.

       With  the  --remote option, this will check the default paths for incoming and outgoing changes. This can
       be time-consuming.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       --remote
              check for push and pull

              aliases: sum

   tag
       add one or more tags for the current or given revision:

       hg tag [-f] [-l] [-m TEXT] [-d DATE] [-u USER] [-r REV] NAME...

       Name a particular revision using <name>.

       Tags are used to name particular revisions of the repository and are very  useful  to  compare  different
       revisions, to go back to significant earlier versions or to mark branch points as releases, etc. Changing
       an existing tag is normally disallowed; use -f/--force to override.

       If no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used.

       To facilitate version control, distribution, and merging of  tags,  they  are  stored  as  a  file  named
       ".hgtags"  which  is  managed  similarly to other project files and can be hand-edited if necessary. This
       also means that tagging creates a new commit. The file ".hg/localtags" is used for local tags (not shared
       among repositories).

       Tag  commits  are  usually  made at the head of a branch. If the parent of the working directory is not a
       branch head, hg tag aborts; use -f/--force to force the tag commit to be based on a non-head changeset.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       Since tag names have priority over branch names during revision lookup, using an existing branch name  as
       a tag name is discouraged.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -f, --force
              force tag

       -l, --local
              make the tag local

       -r,--rev <REV>
              revision to tag

       --remove
              remove a tag

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -d,--date <DATE>
              record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
              record the specified user as committer

   tags
       list repository tags:

       hg tags

       This  lists  both regular and local tags. When the -v/--verbose switch is used, a third column "local" is
       printed for local tags.  When the -q/--quiet switch is used, only the tag name is printed.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

   tip
       show the tip revision (DEPRECATED):

       hg tip [-p] [-g]

       The tip revision (usually just called the tip) is the changeset most recently  added  to  the  repository
       (and therefore the most recently changed head).

       If you have just made a commit, that commit will be the tip. If you have just pulled changes from another
       repository, the tip of that repository becomes the current tip. The "tip" tag is special  and  cannot  be
       renamed or assigned to a different changeset.

       This command is deprecated, please use hg heads instead.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -p, --patch
              show patch

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       --style <STYLE>
              display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template

   unbundle
       apply one or more bundle files:

       hg unbundle [-u] FILE...

       Apply one or more bundle files generated by hg bundle.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if an update has unresolved files.

       Options:

       -u, --update
              update to new branch head if changesets were unbundled

   update
       update working directory (or switch revisions):

       hg update [-C|-c|-m] [-d DATE] [[-r] REV]

       Update  the  repository's  working  directory  to  the specified changeset. If no changeset is specified,
       update to the tip of the current named branch and move the active bookmark (see hg help bookmarks).

       Update sets the working directory's parent revision to the specified changeset (see hg help parents).

       If the changeset is not a descendant or  ancestor  of  the  working  directory's  parent  and  there  are
       uncommitted  changes, the update is aborted. With the -c/--check option, the working directory is checked
       for uncommitted changes; if none are found, the working directory is updated to the specified changeset.

       The -C/--clean, -c/--check, and -m/--merge options control what happens if the working directory contains
       uncommitted changes.  At most of one of them can be specified.

       1. If  no option is specified, and if the requested changeset is an ancestor or descendant of the working
          directory's parent, the uncommitted changes are merged into the requested  changeset  and  the  merged
          result  is  left uncommitted. If the requested changeset is not an ancestor or descendant (that is, it
          is on another branch), the update is aborted and the uncommitted changes are preserved.

       2. With the -m/--merge option, the update is allowed even if the requested changeset is not  an  ancestor
          or descendant of the working directory's parent.

       3. With the -c/--check option, the update is aborted and the uncommitted changes are preserved.

       4. With  the -C/--clean option, uncommitted changes are discarded and the working directory is updated to
          the requested changeset.

       To cancel an uncommitted merge (and lose your changes), use hg merge --abort.

       Use null as the changeset to remove the working directory (like hg clone -U).

       If you want to revert just one file to an older revision, use hg revert [-r REV] NAME.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if there are unresolved files.

       Options:

       -C, --clean
              discard uncommitted changes (no backup)

       -c, --check
              require clean working directory

       -m, --merge
              merge uncommitted changes

       -d,--date <DATE>
              tipmost revision matching date

       -r,--rev <REV>
              revision

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
              specify merge tool

              aliases: up checkout co

   verify
       verify the integrity of the repository:

       hg verify

       Verify the integrity of the current repository.

       This will perform an extensive check of the repository's integrity, validating the hashes  and  checksums
       of each entry in the changelog, manifest, and tracked files, as well as the integrity of their crosslinks
       and indices.

       Please see https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/RepositoryCorruption for more information about  recovery  from
       corruption of the repository.

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered.

   version
       output version and copyright information:

       hg version

       output version and copyright information

       Options:

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

BUNDLE FILE FORMATS

       Mercurial  supports  generating  standalone "bundle" files that hold repository data. These "bundles" are
       typically saved locally and used later or exchanged between different repositories, possibly on different
       machines. Example commands using bundles are hg bundle and hg unbundle.

       Generation  of  bundle files is controlled by a "bundle specification" ("bundlespec") string. This string
       tells the bundle generation process how to create the bundle.

       A "bundlespec" string is composed of the following elements:

       type   A string denoting the bundle format to use.

       compression
              Denotes the compression engine to use compressing the raw bundle data.

       parameters
              Arbitrary key-value parameters to further control bundle generation.

       A "bundlespec" string has the following formats:

       <type> The literal bundle format string is used.

       <compression>-<type>
              The compression engine and format are delimited by a hyphen (-).

       Optional parameters follow the <type>. Parameters are URI escaped key=value pairs. Each pair is delimited
       by a semicolon (;). The first parameter begins after a ; immediately following the <type> value.

   Available Types
       The following bundle <type> strings are available:

       v1     Produces a legacy "changegroup" version 1 bundle.

              This  format is compatible with nearly all Mercurial clients because it is the oldest. However, it
              has some limitations, which is why it is no longer the default for new repositories.

              v1 bundles can be used with modern repositories using the "generaldelta" storage format.  However,
              it may take longer to produce the bundle and the resulting bundle may be significantly larger than
              a v2 bundle.

              v1 bundles can only use the gzip, bzip2, and none compression formats.

       v2     Produces a version 2 bundle.

              Version 2 bundles are an extensible format that can store  additional  repository  data  (such  as
              bookmarks  and  phases information) and they can store data more efficiently, resulting in smaller
              bundles.

              Version 2 bundles can also use modern compression engines, such as zstd,  making  them  faster  to
              compress and often smaller.

   Available Compression Engines
       The following bundle <compression> engines can be used:

       bzip2

              An algorithm that produces smaller bundles than gzip.

              All Mercurial clients should support this format.

              This  engine  will likely produce smaller bundles than gzip but will be significantly slower, both
              during compression and decompression.

              If available, the zstd engine can yield similar or better compression at much higher speeds.

       gzip

              zlib compression using the DEFLATE algorithm.

              All Mercurial clients should support this format. The compression algorithm strikes  a  reasonable
              balance between compression ratio and size.

       none

              No compression is performed.

              Use this compression engine to explicitly disable compression.

   Examples
       v2

              Produce a v2 bundle using default options, including compression.

       none-v1

              Produce a v1 bundle with no compression.

       zstd-v2

              Produce a v2 bundle with zstandard compression using default settings.

       zstd-v1

              This errors because zstd is not supported for v1 types.

COLORIZING OUTPUTS

       Mercurial colorizes output from several commands.

       For  example,  the  diff  command shows additions in green and deletions in red, while the status command
       shows modified files in magenta. Many other commands have analogous colors. It is possible  to  customize
       these colors.

       To enable color (default) whenever possible use:

       [ui]
       color = yes

       To disable color use:

       [ui]
       color = no

       See hg help config.ui.color for details.

       The  default  pager  on  Windows  does  not support color, so enabling the pager will effectively disable
       color.  See hg help config.ui.paginate to disable the pager.  Alternately, MSYS and Cygwin shells provide
       less  as  a pager, which can be configured to support ANSI color mode.  Windows 10 natively supports ANSI
       color mode.

   Mode
       Mercurial can use various systems to display color. The supported modes are ansi,  win32,  and  terminfo.
       See hg help config.color for details about how to control the mode.

   Effects
       Other  effects  in  addition to color, like bold and underlined text, are also available. By default, the
       terminfo database is used to find the terminal codes used to change color and effect.  If terminfo is not
       available, then effects are rendered with the ECMA-48 SGR control function (aka ANSI escape codes).

       The  available  effects  in  terminfo  mode are 'blink', 'bold', 'dim', 'inverse', 'invisible', 'italic',
       'standout', and  'underline';  in  ECMA-48  mode,  the  options  are  'bold',  'inverse',  'italic',  and
       'underline'.   How  each  is  rendered depends on the terminal emulator.  Some may not be available for a
       given terminal type, and will be silently ignored.

       If the terminfo entry for your terminal is missing codes for an effect or has the wrong  codes,  you  can
       add or override those codes in your configuration:

       [color]
       terminfo.dim = \E[2m

       where 'E' is substituted with an escape character.

   Labels
       Text  receives  color  effects  depending on the labels that it has. Many default Mercurial commands emit
       labelled text. You can also define your own labels in templates using the label  function,  see  hg  help
       templates. A single portion of text may have more than one label. In that case, effects given to the last
       label will override any other effects. This includes the special "none"  effect,  which  nullifies  other
       effects.

       Labels  are  normally  invisible.  In  order  to see these labels and their position in the text, use the
       global --color=debug option. The same anchor text may be associated to multiple labels, e.g.

          [log.changeset changeset.secret|changeset:   22611:6f0a53c8f587]

       The following are the default effects for some default labels. Default effects  may  be  overridden  from
       your configuration file:

       [color]
       status.modified = blue bold underline red_background
       status.added = green bold
       status.removed = red bold blue_background
       status.deleted = cyan bold underline
       status.unknown = magenta bold underline
       status.ignored = black bold

       # 'none' turns off all effects
       status.clean = none
       status.copied = none

       qseries.applied = blue bold underline
       qseries.unapplied = black bold
       qseries.missing = red bold

       diff.diffline = bold
       diff.extended = cyan bold
       diff.file_a = red bold
       diff.file_b = green bold
       diff.hunk = magenta
       diff.deleted = red
       diff.inserted = green
       diff.changed = white
       diff.tab =
       diff.trailingwhitespace = bold red_background

       # Blank so it inherits the style of the surrounding label
       changeset.public =
       changeset.draft =
       changeset.secret =

       resolve.unresolved = red bold
       resolve.resolved = green bold

       bookmarks.active = green

       branches.active = none
       branches.closed = black bold
       branches.current = green
       branches.inactive = none

       tags.normal = green
       tags.local = black bold

       rebase.rebased = blue
       rebase.remaining = red bold

       shelve.age = cyan
       shelve.newest = green bold
       shelve.name = blue bold

       histedit.remaining = red bold

   Custom colors
       Because  there are only eight standard colors, Mercurial allows you to define color names for other color
       slots which might be available for your terminal type, assuming terminfo mode.  For instance:

       color.brightblue = 12
       color.pink = 207
       color.orange = 202

       to set 'brightblue' to color slot 12 (useful for 16 color terminals that have brighter colors defined  in
       the  upper  eight)  and,  'pink'  and  'orange' to colors in 256-color xterm's default color cube.  These
       defined colors may then be used as any of the pre-defined eight, including appending '_background' to set
       the background to that color.

DATE FORMATS

       Some commands allow the user to specify a date, e.g.:

       • backout, commit, import, tag: Specify the commit date.

       • log, revert, update: Select revision(s) by date.

       Many date formats are valid. Here are some examples:

       • Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006 (local timezone assumed)

       • Dec 6 13:18 -0600 (year assumed, time offset provided)

       • Dec 6 13:18 UTC (UTC and GMT are aliases for +0000)

       • Dec 6 (midnight)

       • 13:18 (today assumed)

       • 3:39 (3:39AM assumed)

       • 3:39pm (15:39)

       • 2006-12-06 13:18:29 (ISO 8601 format)

       • 2006-12-6 13:182006-12-612-612/612/6/6 (Dec 6 2006)

       • today (midnight)

       • yesterday (midnight)

       • now - right now

       Lastly, there is Mercurial's internal format:

       • 1165411109 0 (Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006 UTC)

       This is the internal representation format for dates. The first number is the number of seconds since the
       epoch (1970-01-01 00:00 UTC). The second is the offset of the local timezone,  in  seconds  west  of  UTC
       (negative if the timezone is east of UTC).

       The log command also accepts date ranges:

       • <DATE - at or before a given date/time

       • >DATE - on or after a given date/time

       • DATE to DATE - a date range, inclusive

       • -DAYS - within a given number of days of today

DIFF FORMATS

       Mercurial's  default  format  for  showing  changes between two versions of a file is compatible with the
       unified format of GNU diff, which can be used by GNU patch and many other standard tools.

       While this standard format is often enough, it does not encode the following information:

       • executable status and other permission bits

       • copy or rename information

       • changes in binary files

       • creation or deletion of empty files

       Mercurial also supports the extended diff format from the git VCS which addresses these limitations.  The
       git  diff  format  is not produced by default because a few widespread tools still do not understand this
       format.

       This means that when generating diffs from a Mercurial repository (e.g. with hg export),  you  should  be
       careful  about things like file copies and renames or other things mentioned above, because when applying
       a standard diff to  a  different  repository,  this  extra  information  is  lost.  Mercurial's  internal
       operations  (like push and pull) are not affected by this, because they use an internal binary format for
       communicating changes.

       To make Mercurial produce the git extended diff format, use the --git option available for many commands,
       or  set 'git = True' in the [diff] section of your configuration file. You do not need to set this option
       when importing diffs in this format or using them in the mq extension.

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

       HG     Path to the 'hg' executable, automatically passed  when  running  hooks,  extensions  or  external
              tools.  If unset or empty, this is the hg executable's name if it's frozen, or an executable named
              'hg' (with %PATHEXT% [defaulting to COM/EXE/BAT/CMD] extensions on Windows) is searched.

       HGEDITOR
              This is the name of the editor to run when committing. See EDITOR.

              (deprecated, see hg help config.ui.editor)

       HGENCODING
              This overrides the default locale setting detected by Mercurial.  This setting is used to  convert
              data  including  usernames,  changeset  descriptions, tag names, and branches. This setting can be
              overridden with the --encoding command-line option.

       HGENCODINGMODE
              This sets Mercurial's behavior for handling unknown characters while transcoding user  input.  The
              default  is  "strict", which causes Mercurial to abort if it can't map a character. Other settings
              include "replace", which replaces unknown characters, and "ignore", which drops them. This setting
              can be overridden with the --encodingmode command-line option.

       HGENCODINGAMBIGUOUS
              This sets Mercurial's behavior for handling characters with "ambiguous" widths like accented Latin
              characters with East Asian fonts. By default, Mercurial assumes ambiguous characters  are  narrow,
              set this variable to "wide" if such characters cause formatting problems.

       HGMERGE
              An  executable  to  use  for  resolving  merge  conflicts. The program will be executed with three
              arguments: local file, remote file, ancestor file.

              (deprecated, see hg help config.ui.merge)

       HGRCPATH
              A list of files or directories to search for configuration files. Item separator is ":"  on  Unix,
              ";"  on  Windows. If HGRCPATH is not set, platform default search path is used. If empty, only the
              .hg/hgrc from the current repository is read.

              For each element in HGRCPATH:

              • if it's a directory, all files ending with .rc are added

              • otherwise, the file itself will be added

       HGPLAIN
              When set, this disables any configuration settings that might change Mercurial's  default  output.
              This  includes  encoding,  defaults,  verbose  mode,  debug  mode,  quiet  mode,  tracebacks,  and
              localization. This can be useful when scripting against Mercurial in the  face  of  existing  user
              configuration.

              In  addition to the features disabled by HGPLAIN=, the following values can be specified to adjust
              behavior:

              +strictflags

                     Restrict parsing of command line flags.

              Equivalent options set via command line flags or environment variables are not overridden.

              See hg help scripting for details.

       HGPLAINEXCEPT
              This is a comma-separated list of features to preserve when  HGPLAIN  is  enabled.  Currently  the
              following values are supported:

              alias

                     Don't remove aliases.

              color

                     Don't disable colored output.

              i18n

                     Preserve internationalization.

              revsetalias

                     Don't remove revset aliases.

              templatealias

                     Don't remove template aliases.

              progress

                     Don't hide progress output.

              Setting HGPLAINEXCEPT to anything (even an empty string) will enable plain mode.

       HGUSER This is the string used as the author of a commit. If not set, available values will be considered
              in this order:

              • HGUSER (deprecated)

              • configuration files from the HGRCPATH

              • EMAIL

              • interactive prompt

              • LOGNAME (with @hostname appended)

              (deprecated, see hg help config.ui.username)

       EMAIL  May be used as the author of a commit; see HGUSER.

       LOGNAME
              May be used as the author of a commit; see HGUSER.

       VISUAL This is the name of the editor to use when committing. See EDITOR.

       EDITOR Sometimes Mercurial needs to open a text file in an editor for a user to modify, for example  when
              writing  commit messages. The editor it uses is determined by looking at the environment variables
              HGEDITOR, VISUAL and EDITOR, in that order. The first non-empty one is chosen. If all of them  are
              empty, the editor defaults to 'sensible-editor'.

       PYTHONPATH
              This  is  used  by  Python  to  find imported modules and may need to be set appropriately if this
              Mercurial is not installed system-wide.

USING ADDITIONAL FEATURES

       Mercurial has the ability to add new features through the use  of  extensions.  Extensions  may  add  new
       commands, add options to existing commands, change the default behavior of commands, or implement hooks.

       To  enable  the  "foo"  extension,  either shipped with Mercurial or in the Python search path, create an
       entry for it in your configuration file, like this:

       [extensions]
       foo =

       You may also specify the full path to an extension:

       [extensions]
       myfeature = ~/.hgext/myfeature.py

       See hg help config for more information on configuration files.

       Extensions are not loaded by default for a variety of reasons: they can increase startup  overhead;  they
       may  be  meant for advanced usage only; they may provide potentially dangerous abilities (such as letting
       you destroy or modify history); they might not be ready for prime time; or  they  may  alter  some  usual
       behaviors of stock Mercurial. It is thus up to the user to activate extensions as needed.

       To  explicitly  disable  an  extension enabled in a configuration file of broader scope, prepend its path
       with !:

       [extensions]
       # disabling extension bar residing in /path/to/extension/bar.py
       bar = !/path/to/extension/bar.py
       # ditto, but no path was supplied for extension baz
       baz = !

       disabled extensions:

          acl    hooks for controlling repository access

          blackbox
                 log repository events to a blackbox for debugging

          bugzilla
                 hooks for integrating with the Bugzilla bug tracker

          censor erase file content at a given revision

          churn  command to display statistics about repository history

          clonebundles
                 advertise pre-generated bundles to seed clones

          convert
                 import revisions from foreign VCS repositories into Mercurial

          eol    automatically manage newlines in repository files

          extdiff
                 command to allow external programs to compare revisions

          factotum
                 http authentication with factotum

          githelp
                 try mapping git commands to Mercurial commands

          gpg    commands to sign and verify changesets

          hgk    browse the repository in a graphical way

          highlight
                 syntax highlighting for hgweb (requires Pygments)

          histedit
                 interactive history editing

          keyword
                 expand keywords in tracked files

          largefiles
                 track large binary files

          mq     manage a stack of patches

          notify hooks for sending email push notifications

          patchbomb
                 command to send changesets as (a series of) patch emails

          purge  command to delete untracked files from the working directory

          rebase command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor

          relink recreates hardlinks between repository clones

          schemes
                 extend schemes with shortcuts to repository swarms

          share  share a common history between several working directories

          shelve save and restore changes to the working directory

          strip  strip changesets and their descendants from history

          transplant
                 command to transplant changesets from another branch

          win32mbcs
                 allow the use of MBCS paths with problematic encodings

          zeroconf
                 discover and advertise repositories on the local network

SPECIFYING FILE SETS

       Mercurial supports a functional language for selecting a set of files.

       Like other file patterns, this pattern type is indicated by a prefix, 'set:'.  The  language  supports  a
       number of predicates which are joined by infix operators. Parenthesis can be used for grouping.

       Identifiers  such  as  filenames  or patterns must be quoted with single or double quotes if they contain
       characters outside of [.*{}[]?/\_a-zA-Z0-9\x80-\xff] or if they match one of the  predefined  predicates.
       This  generally  applies to file patterns other than globs and arguments for predicates. Pattern prefixes
       such as path: may be specified without quoting.

       Special characters can be used in quoted identifiers by escaping them,  e.g.,  \n  is  interpreted  as  a
       newline. To prevent them from being interpreted, strings can be prefixed with r, e.g. r'...'.

       See also hg help patterns.

   Operators
       There is a single prefix operator:

       not x

              Files not in x. Short form is ! x.

       These are the supported infix operators:

       x and y

              The intersection of files in x and y. Short form is x & y.

       x or y

              The union of files in x and y. There are two alternative short forms: x | y and x + y.

       x - y

              Files in x but not in y.

   Predicates
       The following predicates are supported:

       added()

              File that is added according to hg status.

       binary()

              File that appears to be binary (contains NUL bytes).

       clean()

              File that is clean according to hg status.

       copied()

              File that is recorded as being copied.

       deleted()

              Alias for missing().

       encoding(name)

              File  can  be  successfully  decoded  with  the  given  character  encoding. May not be useful for
              encodings other than ASCII and UTF-8.

       eol(style)

              File contains newlines of the given style (dos, unix, mac). Binary files are excluded, files  with
              mixed line endings match multiple styles.

       exec()

              File that is marked as executable.

       grep(regex)

              File contains the given regular expression.

       hgignore()

              File that matches the active .hgignore pattern.

       ignored()

              File that is ignored according to hg status. These files will only be considered if this predicate
              is used.

       missing()

              File that is missing according to hg status.

       modified()

              File that is modified according to hg status.

       portable()

              File that has a portable name. (This doesn't include filenames with case collisions.)

       removed()

              File that is removed according to hg status.

       resolved()

              File that is marked resolved according to hg resolve -l.

       revs(revs, pattern)

              Evaluate set in the specified revisions. If the revset match multiple revs, this will return  file
              matching pattern in any of the revision.

       size(expression)

              File size matches the given expression. Examples:

              • size('1k') - files from 1024 to 2047 bytes

              • size('< 20k') - files less than 20480 bytes

              • size('>= .5MB') - files at least 524288 bytes

              • size('4k - 1MB') - files from 4096 bytes to 1048576 bytes

       status(base, rev, pattern)

              Evaluate predicate using status change between base and rev. Examples:

              • status(3, 7, added()) - matches files added from "3" to "7"

       subrepo([pattern])

              Subrepositories whose paths match the given pattern.

       symlink()

              File that is marked as a symlink.

       unknown()

              File that is unknown according to hg status. These files will only be considered if this predicate
              is used.

       unresolved()

              File that is marked unresolved according to hg resolve -l.

   Examples
       Some sample queries:

       • Show status of files that appear to be binary in the working directory:

         hg status -A "set:binary()"

       • Forget files that are in .hgignore but are already tracked:

         hg forget "set:hgignore() and not ignored()"

       • Find text files that contain a string:

         hg files "set:grep(magic) and not binary()"

       • Find C files in a non-standard encoding:

         hg files "set:**.c and not encoding('UTF-8')"

       • Revert copies of large binary files:

         hg revert "set:copied() and binary() and size('>1M')"

       • Revert files that were added to the working directory:

         hg revert "set:revs('wdir()', added())"

       • Remove files listed in foo.lst that contain the letter a or b:

         hg remove "set: listfile:foo.lst and (**a* or **b*)"

COMMAND-LINE FLAGS

       Most Mercurial commands accept various flags.

   Flag names
       Flags for each command are listed in hg  help for  that  command.   Additionally,  some  flags,  such  as
       --repository,  are  global  and  can  be used with any command - those are seen in hg help -v, and can be
       specified before or after the command.

       Every flag has at least a long name, such as --repository. Some flags may also have  a  short  one-letter
       name, such as the equivalent -R. Using the short or long name is equivalent and has the same effect.

       Flags  that  have a short name can also be bundled together - for instance, to specify both --edit (short
       -e) and --interactive (short -i), one could use:

       hg commit -ei

       If any of the bundled flags takes a value (i.e. is not a boolean), it  must  be  last,  followed  by  the
       value:

       hg commit -im 'Message'

   Flag types
       Mercurial command-line flags can be strings, numbers, booleans, or lists of strings.

   Specifying flag values
       The following syntaxes are allowed, assuming a flag 'flagname' with short name 'f':

       --flagname=foo
       --flagname foo
       -f foo
       -ffoo

       This syntax applies to all non-boolean flags (strings, numbers or lists).

   Specifying boolean flags
       Boolean  flags  do not take a value parameter. To specify a boolean, use the flag name to set it to true,
       or the same name prefixed with 'no-' to set it to false:

       hg commit --interactive
       hg commit --no-interactive

   Specifying list flags
       List flags take multiple values. To specify them, pass the flag multiple times:

       hg files --include mercurial --include tests

   Setting flag defaults
       In order to set a default value for a flag in an hgrc file, it is recommended to use aliases:

       [alias]
       commit = commit --interactive

       For more information on hgrc files, see hg help config.

   Overriding flags on the command line
       If the same non-list flag is specified multiple times on the command line, the  latest  specification  is
       used:

       hg commit -m "Ignored value" -m "Used value"

       This includes the use of aliases - e.g., if one has:

       [alias]
       committemp = commit -m "Ignored value"

       then the following command will override that -m:

       hg committemp -m "Used value"

   Overriding flag defaults
       Every  flag  has  a  default  value,  and  you may also set your own defaults in hgrc as described above.
       Except for list flags, defaults can be overridden on the command line simply by specifying  the  flag  in
       that location.

   Hidden flags
       Some  flags  are  not  shown  in  a command's help by default - specifically, those that are deemed to be
       experimental, deprecated or advanced. To show all flags, add the --verbose flag for the help command:

       hg help --verbose commit

GLOSSARY

       Ancestor
              Any changeset that can be reached  by  an  unbroken  chain  of  parent  changesets  from  a  given
              changeset. More precisely, the ancestors of a changeset can be defined by two properties: a parent
              of a changeset is an ancestor, and a parent of an ancestor is an ancestor. See also: 'Descendant'.

       Bookmark
              Bookmarks are pointers to certain commits that move when committing. They are similar to  tags  in
              that  it  is  possible to use bookmark names in all places where Mercurial expects a changeset ID,
              e.g., with hg update. Unlike tags, bookmarks move along when you make a commit.

              Bookmarks can be renamed, copied and deleted. Bookmarks are  local,  unless  they  are  explicitly
              pushed  or  pulled  between  repositories.  Pushing and pulling bookmarks allow you to collaborate
              with others on a branch without creating a named branch.

       Branch (Noun) A child changeset that has been created from a parent that is not a head. These  are  known
              as topological branches, see 'Branch, topological'. If a topological branch is named, it becomes a
              named branch. If a topological branch is not named, it becomes an anonymous branch.  See  'Branch,
              anonymous' and 'Branch, named'.

              Branches  may  be created when changes are pulled from or pushed to a remote repository, since new
              heads may be created by these operations. Note that the term branch can also be used informally to
              describe  a  development  process  in  which  certain  development  is done independently of other
              development. This is sometimes done explicitly with a named  branch,  but  it  can  also  be  done
              locally, using bookmarks or clones and anonymous branches.

              Example: "The experimental branch."

              (Verb)  The  action of creating a child changeset which results in its parent having more than one
              child.

              Example: "I'm going to branch at X."

       Branch, anonymous
              Every time a new child changeset is created from a parent that is not a head and the name  of  the
              branch is not changed, a new anonymous branch is created.

       Branch, closed
              A named branch whose branch heads have all been closed.

       Branch, default
              The branch assigned to a changeset when no name has previously been assigned.

       Branch head
              See 'Head, branch'.

       Branch, inactive
              If  a  named  branch  has  no topological heads, it is considered to be inactive. As an example, a
              feature branch becomes inactive when it is merged into the default branch. The hg branches command
              shows inactive branches by default, though they can be hidden with hg branches --active.

              NOTE:  this  concept  is deprecated because it is too implicit.  Branches should now be explicitly
              closed using hg commit --close-branch when they are no longer needed.

       Branch, named
              A collection of changesets which have the same branch name. By default, children of a changeset in
              a  named branch belong to the same named branch. A child can be explicitly assigned to a different
              branch. See hg help branch, hg help branches and hg commit --close-branch for more information  on
              managing branches.

              Named  branches  can  be  thought of as a kind of namespace, dividing the collection of changesets
              that comprise the repository into a  collection  of  disjoint  subsets.  A  named  branch  is  not
              necessarily  a topological branch. If a new named branch is created from the head of another named
              branch, or the default branch, but no further changesets are added to that previous  branch,  then
              that previous branch will be a branch in name only.

       Branch tip
              See 'Tip, branch'.

       Branch, topological
              Every  time  a  new child changeset is created from a parent that is not a head, a new topological
              branch is created. If a topological branch is named, it becomes a named branch. If  a  topological
              branch is not named, it becomes an anonymous branch of the current, possibly default, branch.

       Changelog
              A  record of the changesets in the order in which they were added to the repository. This includes
              details such as changeset id, author, commit message, date, and list of changed files.

       Changeset
              A snapshot of the state of the repository used to record a change.

       Changeset, child
              The converse of parent changeset: if P is a parent of C, then C is a child of P. There is no limit
              to the number of children that a changeset may have.

       Changeset id
              A  SHA-1  hash  that  uniquely identifies a changeset. It may be represented as either a "long" 40
              hexadecimal digit string, or a "short" 12 hexadecimal digit string.

       Changeset, merge
              A changeset with two parents. This occurs when a merge is committed.

       Changeset, parent
              A revision upon which a child changeset is based. Specifically, a parent changeset of a  changeset
              C  is  a  changeset  whose  node  immediately  precedes  C in the DAG. Changesets have at most two
              parents.

       Checkout
              (Noun) The working directory being updated to a specific revision. This  use  should  probably  be
              avoided where possible, as changeset is much more appropriate than checkout in this context.

              Example: "I'm using checkout X."

              (Verb) Updating the working directory to a specific changeset. See hg help update.

              Example: "I'm going to check out changeset X."

       Child changeset
              See 'Changeset, child'.

       Close changeset
              See 'Head, closed branch'.

       Closed branch
              See 'Branch, closed'.

       Clone  (Noun)  An  entire  or  partial  copy  of a repository. The partial clone must be in the form of a
              revision and its ancestors.

              Example: "Is your clone up to date?"

              (Verb) The process of creating a clone, using hg clone.

              Example: "I'm going to clone the repository."

       Closed branch head
              See 'Head, closed branch'.

       Commit (Noun) A synonym for changeset.

              Example: "Is the bug fixed in your recent commit?"

              (Verb) The act of recording changes to a  repository.  When  files  are  committed  in  a  working
              directory, Mercurial finds the differences between the committed files and their parent changeset,
              creating a new changeset in the repository.

              Example: "You should commit those changes now."

       Cset   A common abbreviation of the term changeset.

       DAG    The repository of changesets of a distributed version control system (DVCS) can be described as  a
              directed  acyclic graph (DAG), consisting of nodes and edges, where nodes correspond to changesets
              and edges imply a parent -> child relation. This graph can be visualized by graphical  tools  such
              as  hg  log  --graph.  In Mercurial, the DAG is limited by the requirement for children to have at
              most two parents.

       Deprecated
              Feature removed from documentation, but not scheduled for removal.

       Default branch
              See 'Branch, default'.

       Descendant
              Any changeset that can be reached by a chain of child changesets  from  a  given  changeset.  More
              precisely,  the  descendants  of  a  changeset  can  be  defined by two properties: the child of a
              changeset is a descendant, and the child of a descendant is a descendant. See also: 'Ancestor'.

       Diff   (Noun) The difference between the contents  and  attributes  of  files  in  two  changesets  or  a
              changeset  and  the current working directory. The difference is usually represented in a standard
              form called a "diff" or "patch". The "git diff" format is used when the  changes  include  copies,
              renames, or changes to file attributes, none of which can be represented/handled by classic "diff"
              and "patch".

              Example: "Did you see my correction in the diff?"

              (Verb) Diffing two changesets is the action of creating a diff or patch.

              Example: "If you diff with changeset X, you will see what I mean."

       Directory, working
              The working directory represents the state of  the  files  tracked  by  Mercurial,  that  will  be
              recorded  in  the  next  commit. The working directory initially corresponds to the snapshot at an
              existing changeset, known as the parent of the working directory. See 'Parent, working directory'.
              The  state  may  be  modified  by  changes  to  the  files  introduced manually or by a merge. The
              repository metadata exists in the .hg directory inside the working directory.

       Draft  Changesets in the draft phase have not been shared with publishing repositories and  may  thus  be
              safely changed by history-modifying extensions. See hg help phases.

       Experimental
              Feature that may change or be removed at a later date.

       Graph  See DAG and hg log --graph.

       Head   The  term 'head' may be used to refer to both a branch head or a repository head, depending on the
              context. See 'Head, branch' and 'Head, repository' for specific definitions.

              Heads are where development generally takes place and are the usual targets for update  and  merge
              operations.

       Head, branch
              A changeset with no descendants on the same named branch.

       Head, closed branch
              A  changeset that marks a head as no longer interesting. The closed head is no longer listed by hg
              heads. A branch is considered closed when all its heads are closed and consequently is not  listed
              by hg branches.

              Closed heads can be re-opened by committing new changeset as the child of the changeset that marks
              a head as closed.

       Head, repository
              A topological head which has not been closed.

       Head, topological
              A changeset with no children in the repository.

       History, immutable
              Once committed, changesets cannot be altered.  Extensions which appear to change history  actually
              create new changesets that replace existing ones, and then destroy the old changesets. Doing so in
              public repositories can result in old changesets being reintroduced to the repository.

       History, rewriting
              The changesets in a repository are immutable. However, extensions to  Mercurial  can  be  used  to
              alter the repository, usually in such a way as to preserve changeset contents.

       Immutable history
              See 'History, immutable'.

       Merge changeset
              See 'Changeset, merge'.

       Manifest
              Each changeset has a manifest, which is the list of files that are tracked by the changeset.

       Merge  Used  to  bring together divergent branches of work. When you update to a changeset and then merge
              another changeset, you bring the history of the latter changeset into your working directory. Once
              conflicts  are  resolved  (and marked), this merge may be committed as a merge changeset, bringing
              two branches together in the DAG.

       Named branch
              See 'Branch, named'.

       Null changeset
              The empty changeset. It is the parent state of  newly-initialized  repositories  and  repositories
              with  no checked out revision. It is thus the parent of root changesets and the effective ancestor
              when merging unrelated changesets. Can be specified by the alias 'null' or  by  the  changeset  ID
              '000000000000'.

       Parent See 'Changeset, parent'.

       Parent changeset
              See 'Changeset, parent'.

       Parent, working directory
              The  working  directory parent reflects a virtual revision which is the child of the changeset (or
              two changesets with an uncommitted merge) shown by hg parents. This is  changed  with  hg  update.
              Other  commands  to see the working directory parent are hg summary and hg id. Can be specified by
              the alias ".".

       Patch  (Noun) The product of a diff operation.

              Example: "I've sent you my patch."

              (Verb) The process of using a patch file to transform one changeset into another.

              Example: "You will need to patch that revision."

       Phase  A per-changeset state tracking how the changeset has been or should be shared. See hg help phases.

       Public Changesets in the public phase have been shared with publishing  repositories  and  are  therefore
              considered immutable. See hg help phases.

       Pull   An  operation in which changesets in a remote repository which are not in the local repository are
              brought into the local repository. Note that this operation without special arguments only updates
              the repository, it does not update the files in the working directory. See hg help pull.

       Push   An  operation  in  which changesets in a local repository which are not in a remote repository are
              sent to the remote repository. Note that this operation  only  adds  changesets  which  have  been
              committed locally to the remote repository. Uncommitted changes are not sent. See hg help push.

       Repository
              The  metadata  describing  all  recorded  states  of a collection of files. Each recorded state is
              represented by a changeset. A repository is usually (but not always) found in the .hg subdirectory
              of a working directory. Any recorded state can be recreated by "updating" a working directory to a
              specific changeset.

       Repository head
              See 'Head, repository'.

       Revision
              A state of the repository at some point in time. Earlier revisions can be updated to by  using  hg
              update.  See also 'Revision number'; See also 'Changeset'.

       Revision number
              This  integer uniquely identifies a changeset in a specific repository. It represents the order in
              which changesets were added to a repository, starting  with  revision  number  0.  Note  that  the
              revision  number  may  be different in each clone of a repository. To identify changesets uniquely
              between different clones, see 'Changeset id'.

       Revlog History storage mechanism used by Mercurial. It is a form of delta encoding, with occasional  full
              revision  of  data  followed  by  delta of each successive revision. It includes data and an index
              pointing to the data.

       Rewriting history
              See 'History, rewriting'.

       Root   A changeset that has only the null changeset as its parent. Most repositories have only  a  single
              root changeset.

       Secret Changesets in the secret phase may not be shared via push, pull, or clone. See hg help phases.

       Tag    An alternative name given to a changeset. Tags can be used in all places where Mercurial expects a
              changeset ID, e.g., with hg update. The creation of a tag is stored in the history and  will  thus
              automatically be shared with other using push and pull.

       Tip    The  changeset  with  the  highest  revision  number. It is the changeset most recently added in a
              repository.

       Tip, branch
              The head of a given branch with the highest revision number. When a  branch  name  is  used  as  a
              revision  identifier,  it  refers  to  the  branch tip. See also 'Branch, head'. Note that because
              revision numbers may be different in different repository clones, the branch tip may be  different
              in different cloned repositories.

       Update (Noun) Another synonym of changeset.

              Example: "I've pushed an update."

              (Verb)  This  term is usually used to describe updating the state of the working directory to that
              of a specific changeset. See hg help update.

              Example: "You should update."

       Working directory
              See 'Directory, working'.

       Working directory parent
              See 'Parent, working directory'.

SYNTAX FOR MERCURIAL IGNORE FILES

   Synopsis
       The Mercurial system uses a file called .hgignore in the root directory of a repository  to  control  its
       behavior when it searches for files that it is not currently tracking.

   Description
       The  working  directory  of a Mercurial repository will often contain files that should not be tracked by
       Mercurial. These include backup files created by editors and build products created by compilers.   These
       files  can  be  ignored  by  listing  them  in a .hgignore file in the root of the working directory. The
       .hgignore file must be created manually. It is typically put under version control, so that the  settings
       will propagate to other repositories with push and pull.

       An untracked file is ignored if its path relative to the repository root directory, or any prefix path of
       that path, is matched against any pattern in .hgignore.

       For example, say we have an untracked file, file.c, at a/b/file.c inside our repository.  Mercurial  will
       ignore file.c if any pattern in .hgignore matches a/b/file.c, a/b or a.

       In  addition,  a Mercurial configuration file can reference a set of per-user or global ignore files. See
       the ignore configuration key on the [ui] section of hg help config for details of how to configure  these
       files.

       To  control  Mercurial's  handling of files that it manages, many commands support the -I and -X options;
       see hg help <command> and hg help patterns for details.

       Files that are already tracked are not affected by .hgignore,  even  if  they  appear  in  .hgignore.  An
       untracked  file  X  can  be  explicitly  added with hg add X, even if X would be excluded by a pattern in
       .hgignore.

   Syntax
       An ignore file is a plain text file consisting of a list of patterns, with one pattern  per  line.  Empty
       lines  are  skipped. The # character is treated as a comment character, and the \ character is treated as
       an escape character.

       Mercurial supports several pattern  syntaxes.  The  default  syntax  used  is  Python/Perl-style  regular
       expressions.

       To change the syntax used, use a line of the following form:

       syntax: NAME

       where NAME is one of the following:

       regexp

              Regular expression, Python/Perl syntax.

       glob

              Shell-style glob.

       The  chosen  syntax  stays  in  effect  when  parsing  all  patterns that follow, until another syntax is
       selected.

       Neither glob nor regexp patterns are rooted. A glob-syntax pattern of the form  *.c  will  match  a  file
       ending  in  .c in any directory, and a regexp pattern of the form \.c$ will do the same. To root a regexp
       pattern, start it with ^.

       Subdirectories can have their own .hgignore settings by adding subinclude:path/to/subdir/.hgignore to the
       root .hgignore. See hg help patterns for details on subinclude: and include:.

       Note   Patterns  specified  in  other  than .hgignore are always rooted.  Please see hg help patterns for
              details.

   Example
       Here is an example ignore file.

       # use glob syntax.
       syntax: glob

       *.elc
       *.pyc
       *~

       # switch to regexp syntax.
       syntax: regexp
       ^\.pc/

CONFIGURING HGWEB

       Mercurial's internal web server, hgweb, can serve either a single repository, or a tree of  repositories.
       In  the  second  case, repository paths and global options can be defined using a dedicated configuration
       file common to hg serve, hgweb.wsgi, hgweb.cgi and hgweb.fcgi.

       This file uses the same syntax as other Mercurial configuration files but recognizes only  the  following
       sections:

          • web

          • paths

          • collections

       The web options are thoroughly described in hg help config.

       The  paths  section  maps URL paths to paths of repositories in the filesystem. hgweb will not expose the
       filesystem  directly  -  only  Mercurial  repositories  can  be  published  and  only  according  to  the
       configuration.

       The  left hand side is the path in the URL. Note that hgweb reserves subpaths like rev or file, try using
       different names for nested repositories to avoid confusing effects.

       The right hand side is the path in the filesystem. If the specified path ends with * or ** the filesystem
       will  be  searched  recursively  for  repositories below that point.  With * it will not recurse into the
       repositories it finds (except for .hg/patches).  With ** it will also search  inside  repository  working
       directories and possibly find subrepositories.

       In this example:

       [paths]
       /projects/a = /srv/tmprepos/a
       /projects/b = c:/repos/b
       / = /srv/repos/*
       /user/bob = /home/bob/repos/**

       • The first two entries make two repositories in different directories appear under the same directory in
         the web interface

       • The third entry will publish  every  Mercurial  repository  found  in  /srv/repos/,  for  instance  the
         repository /srv/repos/quux/ will appear as http://server/quux/

       • The       fourth      entry      will      publish      both      http://server/user/bob/quux/      and
         http://server/user/bob/quux/testsubrepo/

       The collections section is deprecated and has been superseded by paths.

   URLs and Common Arguments
       URLs under each repository have the form /{command}[/{arguments}] where {command} represents the name  of
       a command or handler and {arguments} represents any number of additional URL parameters to that command.

       The  web  server  has  a default style associated with it. Styles map to a collection of named templates.
       Each template is used to render a specific piece of data, such as a changeset or diff.

       The style for the current request can be overwritten two ways. First, if {command} contains a hyphen (-),
       the  text before the hyphen defines the style. For example, /atom-log will render the log command handler
       with the atom style. The second way to set the style  is  with  the  style  query  string  argument.  For
       example, /log?style=atom. The hyphenated URL parameter is preferred.

       Not all templates are available for all styles. Attempting to use a style that doesn't have all templates
       defined may result in an error rendering the page.

       Many commands take a {revision} URL parameter. This defines the changeset to operate on. This is commonly
       specified  as  the  short,  12  digit  hexadecimal abbreviation for the full 40 character unique revision
       identifier. However, any value described by hg help revisions typically works.

   Commands and URLs
       The following web commands and their URLs are available:

   /annotate/{revision}/{path}
       Show changeset information for each line in a file.

       The ignorews, ignorewsamount, ignorewseol, and ignoreblanklines query  string  arguments  have  the  same
       meaning  as  their [annotate] config equivalents. It uses the hgrc boolean parsing logic to interpret the
       value. e.g. 0 and false are false and 1 and true are true. If not defined, the  server  default  settings
       are used.

       The fileannotate template is rendered.

   /archive/{revision}.{format}[/{path}]
       Obtain an archive of repository content.

       The  content and type of the archive is defined by a URL path parameter.  format is the file extension of
       the archive type to be generated. e.g.  zip or tar.bz2. Not all archive types  may  be  allowed  by  your
       server configuration.

       The optional path URL parameter controls content to include in the archive. If omitted, every file in the
       specified revision is present in the archive. If included, only the specified file  or  contents  of  the
       specified directory will be included in the archive.

       No template is used for this handler. Raw, binary content is generated.

   /bookmarks
       Show information about bookmarks.

       No arguments are accepted.

       The bookmarks template is rendered.

   /branches
       Show information about branches.

       All known branches are contained in the output, even closed branches.

       No arguments are accepted.

       The branches template is rendered.

   /changelog[/{revision}]
       Show information about multiple changesets.

       If the optional revision URL argument is absent, information about all changesets starting at tip will be
       rendered. If the revision argument is present, changesets will  be  shown  starting  from  the  specified
       revision.

       If  revision  is  absent,  the  rev  query string argument may be defined. This will perform a search for
       changesets.

       The argument for rev can be a single revision, a revision set, or a literal  keyword  to  search  for  in
       changeset data (equivalent to hg log -k).

       The revcount query string argument defines the maximum numbers of changesets to render.

       For non-searches, the changelog template will be rendered.

   /changeset[/{revision}]
       Show information about a single changeset.

       A  URL  path  argument is the changeset identifier to show. See hg help revisions for possible values. If
       not defined, the tip changeset will be shown.

       The changeset template is  rendered.  Contents  of  the  changesettag,  changesetbookmark,  filenodelink,
       filenolink, and the many templates related to diffs may all be used to produce the output.

   /comparison/{revision}/{path}
       Show a comparison between the old and new versions of a file from changes made on a particular revision.

       This is similar to the diff handler. However, this form features a split or side-by-side diff rather than
       a unified diff.

       The context query string argument can be used to control the lines of context in the diff.

       The filecomparison template is rendered.

   /diff/{revision}/{path}
       Show how a file changed in a particular commit.

       The filediff template is rendered.

       This handler is registered under both the /diff and /filediff paths. /diff is used in modern code.

   /file/{revision}[/{path}]
       Show information about a directory or file in the repository.

       Info about the path given as a URL parameter will be rendered.

       If path is a directory, information about the entries in that directory will be rendered.  This  form  is
       equivalent to the manifest handler.

       If path is a file, information about that file will be shown via the filerevision template.

       If path is not defined, information about the root directory will be rendered.

   /diff/{revision}/{path}
       Show how a file changed in a particular commit.

       The filediff template is rendered.

       This handler is registered under both the /diff and /filediff paths. /diff is used in modern code.

   /filelog/{revision}/{path}
       Show information about the history of a file in the repository.

       The revcount query string argument can be defined to control the maximum number of entries to show.

       The filelog template will be rendered.

   /graph[/{revision}]
       Show information about the graphical topology of the repository.

       Information rendered by this handler can be used to create visual representations of repository topology.

       The revision URL parameter controls the starting changeset. If it's absent, the default is tip.

       The revcount query string argument can define the number of changesets to show information for.

       The  graphtop query string argument can specify the starting changeset for producing jsdata variable that
       is used for rendering graph in JavaScript. By default it has the same value as revision.

       This handler will render the graph template.

   /help[/{topic}]
       Render help documentation.

       This web command is roughly equivalent to hg help. If a  topic  is  defined,  that  help  topic  will  be
       rendered. If not, an index of available help topics will be rendered.

       The help template will be rendered when requesting help for a topic.  helptopics will be rendered for the
       index of help topics.

   /log[/{revision}[/{path}]]
       Show repository or file history.

       For URLs of the form /log/{revision}, a list of changesets starting at the specified changeset identifier
       is  shown.  If  {revision}  is  not defined, the default is tip. This form is equivalent to the changelog
       handler.

       For URLs of the form /log/{revision}/{file}, the history for a specific file will be shown. This form  is
       equivalent to the filelog handler.

   /manifest[/{revision}[/{path}]]
       Show information about a directory.

       If the URL path arguments are omitted, information about the root directory for the tip changeset will be
       shown.

       Because this handler can only show information for directories, it is recommended to use the file handler
       instead, as it can handle both directories and files.

       The manifest template will be rendered for this handler.

   /changeset[/{revision}]
       Show information about a single changeset.

       A  URL  path  argument is the changeset identifier to show. See hg help revisions for possible values. If
       not defined, the tip changeset will be shown.

       The changeset template is  rendered.  Contents  of  the  changesettag,  changesetbookmark,  filenodelink,
       filenolink, and the many templates related to diffs may all be used to produce the output.

   /shortlog
       Show basic information about a set of changesets.

       This  accepts  the same parameters as the changelog handler. The only difference is the shortlog template
       will be rendered instead of the changelog template.

   /summary
       Show a summary of repository state.

       Information about the latest changesets, bookmarks, tags, and branches is captured by this handler.

       The summary template is rendered.

   /tags
       Show information about tags.

       No arguments are accepted.

       The tags template is rendered.

TECHNICAL IMPLEMENTATION TOPICS

       To access a subtopic, use "hg help internals.{subtopic-name}"

          bundles
                 Bundles

          censor Censor

          changegroups
                 Changegroups

          config Config Registrar

          requirements
                 Repository Requirements

          revlogs
                 Revision Logs

          wireprotocol
                 Wire Protocol

MERGE TOOLS

       To merge files Mercurial uses merge tools.

       A merge tool combines two different versions of a file into a merged file. Merge tools are given the  two
       files  and  the greatest common ancestor of the two file versions, so they can determine the changes made
       on both branches.

       Merge tools are used both for hg resolve, hg merge, hg update, hg backout and in several extensions.

       Usually, the merge tool tries to automatically reconcile  the  files  by  combining  all  non-overlapping
       changes  that  occurred  separately  in  the  two  different  evolutions  of  the same initial base file.
       Furthermore, some interactive merge programs make it  easier  to  manually  resolve  conflicting  merges,
       either  in  a  graphical  way,  or  by  inserting  some  conflict markers. Mercurial does not include any
       interactive merge programs but relies on external tools for that.

   Available merge tools
       External merge tools and their properties are configured in the merge-tools configuration section  -  see
       hgrc(5) - but they can often just be named by their executable.

       A  merge  tool  is generally usable if its executable can be found on the system and if it can handle the
       merge. The executable is found if it is an absolute or  relative  executable  path  or  the  name  of  an
       application  in  the executable search path. The tool is assumed to be able to handle the merge if it can
       handle symlinks if the file is a symlink, if it can handle binary files if the file is binary, and  if  a
       GUI is available if the tool requires a GUI.

       There are some internal merge tools which can be used. The internal merge tools are:

       :dump

              Creates  three  versions  of the files to merge, containing the contents of local, other and base.
              These files can then be used to perform a merge manually. If the file to be merged is named a.txt,
              these  files  will  accordingly  be named a.txt.local, a.txt.other and a.txt.base and they will be
              placed in the same directory as a.txt.

              This implies premerge.  Therefore,  files  aren't  dumped,  if  premerge  runs  successfully.  Use
              :forcedump to forcibly write files out.

       :fail

              Rather  than  attempting  to  merge  files  that  were modified on both branches, it marks them as
              unresolved. The resolve command must be used to resolve these conflicts.

       :forcedump

              Creates three versions of the files as same as :dump, but omits premerge.

       :local

              Uses the local p1() version of files as the merged version.

       :merge

              Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for merging files. It will fail if  there
              are  any conflicts and leave markers in the partially merged file. Markers will have two sections,
              one for each side of merge.

       :merge-local

              Like :merge, but resolve all conflicts non-interactively in favor of the local p1() changes.

       :merge-other

              Like :merge, but resolve all conflicts non-interactively in favor of the other p2() changes.

       :merge3

              Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for merging files. It will fail if  there
              are any conflicts and leave markers in the partially merged file. Marker will have three sections,
              one from each side of the merge and one for the base content.

       :other

              Uses the other p2() version of files as the merged version.

       :prompt

              Asks the user which of the local p1() or the other p2() version to keep as the merged version.

       :tagmerge

              Uses the internal tag merge algorithm (experimental).

       :union

              Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for merging files. It will use both  left
              and right sides for conflict regions.  No markers are inserted.

       Internal  tools  are always available and do not require a GUI but will by default not handle symlinks or
       binary files.

   Choosing a merge tool
       Mercurial uses these rules when deciding which merge tool to use:

       1. If a tool has been specified with the --tool option to merge or resolve, it is used.   If  it  is  the
          name  of  a  tool in the merge-tools configuration, its configuration is used. Otherwise the specified
          tool must be executable by the shell.

       2. If the HGMERGE environment variable is present, its value is used and must be executable by the shell.

       3. If the filename of the  file  to  be  merged  matches  any  of  the  patterns  in  the  merge-patterns
          configuration  section, the first usable merge tool corresponding to a matching pattern is used. Here,
          binary capabilities of the merge tool are not considered.

       4. If ui.merge is set it will be considered next. If the value is not the name of a configured tool,  the
          specified value is used and must be executable by the shell. Otherwise the named tool is used if it is
          usable.

       5. If any usable merge tools are present in the merge-tools  configuration  section,  the  one  with  the
          highest priority is used.

       6. If a program named hgmerge can be found on the system, it is used - but it will by default not be used
          for symlinks and binary files.

       7. If the file to be merged is not binary and is not a symlink, then internal :merge is used.

       8. Otherwise, :prompt is used.

       Note   After selecting a merge program, Mercurial will by default attempt to  merge  the  files  using  a
              simple  merge  algorithm  first.  Only  if  it doesn't succeed because of conflicting changes will
              Mercurial actually execute the merge program. Whether to use the simple merge algorithm first  can
              be controlled by the premerge setting of the merge tool. Premerge is enabled by default unless the
              file is binary or a symlink.

       See the merge-tools and ui sections of hgrc(5) for details on the configuration of merge tools.

PAGER SUPPORT

       Some Mercurial commands can produce a lot of output, and Mercurial will attempt to use a  pager  to  make
       those commands more pleasant.

       To set the pager that should be used, set the application variable:

       [pager]
       pager = less -FRX

       If  no  pager  is  set  in  the user or repository configuration, Mercurial uses the environment variable
       $PAGER. If $PAGER is not set, pager.pager from the default or system configuration is used.  If  none  of
       these are set, a default pager will be used, typically less on Unix and more on Windows.

       On  Windows,  more  is  not  color aware, so using it effectively disables color.  MSYS and Cygwin shells
       provide less  as  a  pager,  which  can  be  configured  to  support  ANSI  color  codes.   See  hg  help
       config.color.pagermode to configure the color mode when invoking a pager.

       You can disable the pager for certain commands by adding them to the pager.ignore list:

       [pager]
       ignore = version, help, update

       To ignore global commands like hg version or hg help, you have to specify them in your user configuration
       file.

       To control whether the pager is used at all for an individual command, you can use --pager=<value>:

          • use as needed: auto.

          • require the pager: yes or on.

          • suppress the pager: no or off (any unrecognized value will also work).

       To globally turn off all attempts to use a pager, set:

       [ui]
       paginate = never

       which will prevent the pager from running.

FILE NAME PATTERNS

       Mercurial accepts several notations for identifying one or more files at a time.

       By default, Mercurial treats filenames as shell-style extended glob patterns.

       Alternate pattern notations must be specified explicitly.

       Note   Patterns specified in .hgignore are not rooted.  Please see hg help hgignore for details.

       To use a plain path name without any pattern matching,  start  it  with  path:.  These  path  names  must
       completely  match starting at the current repository root, and when the path points to a directory, it is
       matched recursively. To match all files in a  directory  non-recursively  (not  including  any  files  in
       subdirectories), rootfilesin: can be used, specifying an absolute path (relative to the repository root).

       To  use an extended glob, start a name with glob:. Globs are rooted at the current directory; a glob such
       as *.c will only match files in the current directory ending with .c.

       The supported glob syntax extensions are ** to match any string across path separators and {a,b} to  mean
       "a or b".

       To  use  a Perl/Python regular expression, start a name with re:.  Regexp pattern matching is anchored at
       the root of the repository.

       To read name patterns from a file, use listfile:  or  listfile0:.   The  latter  expects  null  delimited
       patterns  while the former expects line feeds. Each string read from the file is itself treated as a file
       pattern.

       To read a set of patterns from a file, use include: or subinclude:.  include: will use all  the  patterns
       from  the  given file and treat them as if they had been passed in manually.  subinclude: will only apply
       the patterns against files that are under the subinclude  file's  directory.  See  hg  help  hgignore for
       details on the format of these files.

       All  patterns,  except  for  glob:  specified  in command line (not for -I or -X options), can match also
       against directories: files under matched directories are treated as matched.   For  -I  and  -X  options,
       glob: will match directories recursively.

       Plain examples:

       path:foo/bar        a name bar in a directory named foo in the root
                           of the repository
       path:path:name      a file or directory named "path:name"
       rootfilesin:foo/bar the files in a directory called foo/bar, but not any files
                           in its subdirectories and not a file bar in directory foo

       Glob examples:

       glob:*.c       any name ending in ".c" in the current directory
       *.c            any name ending in ".c" in the current directory
       **.c           any name ending in ".c" in any subdirectory of the
                      current directory including itself.
       foo/*          any file in directory foo
       foo/**         any file in directory foo plus all its subdirectories,
                      recursively
       foo/*.c        any name ending in ".c" in the directory foo
       foo/**.c       any name ending in ".c" in any subdirectory of foo
                      including itself.

       Regexp examples:

       re:.*\.c$      any name ending in ".c", anywhere in the repository

       File examples:

       listfile:list.txt  read list from list.txt with one file pattern per line
       listfile0:list.txt read list from list.txt with null byte delimiters

       See also hg help filesets.

       Include examples:

       include:path/to/mypatternfile    reads patterns to be applied to all paths
       subinclude:path/to/subignorefile reads patterns specifically for paths in the
                                        subdirectory

WORKING WITH PHASES

   What are phases?
       Phases  are  a  system  for  tracking  which changesets have been or should be shared. This helps prevent
       common mistakes when modifying history (for instance, with the mq or rebase extensions).

       Each changeset in a repository is in one of the following phases:

          • public : changeset is visible on a public server

          • draft : changeset is not yet published

          • secret : changeset should not be pushed, pulled, or cloned

       These phases are ordered (public < draft < secret) and no changeset can be in  a  lower  phase  than  its
       ancestors.  For  instance, if a changeset is public, all its ancestors are also public. Lastly, changeset
       phases should only be changed towards the public phase.

   How are phases managed?
       For the most part, phases should work transparently. By default, a changeset  is  created  in  the  draft
       phase and is moved into the public phase when it is pushed to another repository.

       Once  changesets  become  public, extensions like mq and rebase will refuse to operate on them to prevent
       creating duplicate changesets.  Phases can also be manually manipulated  with  the  hg  phase command  if
       needed. See hg help -v phase for examples.

       To make your commits secret by default, put this in your configuration file:

       [phases]
       new-commit = secret

   Phases and servers
       Normally, all servers are publishing by default. This means:

       - all draft changesets that are pulled or cloned appear in phase
       public on the client

       - all draft changesets that are pushed appear as public on both
       client and server

       - secret changesets are neither pushed, pulled, or cloned

       Note   Pulling  a  draft changeset from a publishing server does not mark it as public on the server side
              due to the read-only nature of pull.

       Sometimes it may be desirable to push and pull changesets in the draft phase to  share  unfinished  work.
       This can be done by setting a repository to disable publishing in its configuration file:

       [phases]
       publish = False

       See hg help config for more information on configuration files.

       Note   Servers running older versions of Mercurial are treated as publishing.

       Note   Changesets  in secret phase are not exchanged with the server. This applies to their content: file
              names, file contents,  and  changeset  metadata.  For  technical  reasons,  the  identifier  (e.g.
              d825e4025e39) of the secret changeset may be communicated to the server.

   Examples
          • list changesets in draft or secret phase:

            hg log -r "not public()"

          • change all secret changesets to draft:

            hg phase --draft "secret()"

          • forcibly move the current changeset and descendants from public to draft:

            hg phase --force --draft .

          • show a list of changeset revisions and each corresponding phase:

            hg log --template "{rev} {phase}\n"

          • resynchronize draft changesets relative to a remote repository:

            hg phase -fd "outgoing(URL)"

       See hg help phase for more information on manually manipulating phases.

SPECIFYING REVISIONS

       Mercurial supports several ways to specify revisions.

   Specifying single revisions
       A plain integer is treated as a revision number. Negative integers are treated as sequential offsets from
       the tip, with -1 denoting the tip, -2 denoting the revision prior to the tip, and so forth.

       A 40-digit hexadecimal string is treated as a unique revision identifier.  A hexadecimal string less than
       40  characters  long  is  treated  as  a  unique  revision  identifier and is referred to as a short-form
       identifier. A short-form identifier is only valid  if  it  is  the  prefix  of  exactly  one  full-length
       identifier.

       Any  other  string  is  treated  as a bookmark, tag, or branch name. A bookmark is a movable pointer to a
       revision. A tag is a permanent name associated with a revision. A branch name denotes  the  tipmost  open
       branch  head of that branch - or if they are all closed, the tipmost closed head of the branch. Bookmark,
       tag, and branch names must not contain the ":" character.

       The reserved name "tip" always identifies the most recent revision.

       The reserved name "null" indicates the null revision. This is the revision of an  empty  repository,  and
       the parent of revision 0.

       The  reserved name "." indicates the working directory parent. If no working directory is checked out, it
       is equivalent to null. If an uncommitted merge is in progress, "." is the revision of the first parent.

       Finally, commands that expect a single revision (like hg update)  also  accept  revsets  (see  below  for
       details). When given a revset, they use the last revision of the revset. A few commands accept two single
       revisions (like hg diff). When given a revset, they use the first and the last revisions of the revset.

   Specifying multiple revisions
       Mercurial supports a functional language for selecting a set of revisions. Expressions in  this  language
       are called revsets.

       The language supports a number of predicates which are joined by infix operators. Parenthesis can be used
       for grouping.

       Identifiers such as branch names may need quoting with single or double quotes if they contain characters
       like - or if they match one of the predefined predicates.

       Special  characters  can  be  used  in  quoted identifiers by escaping them, e.g., \n is interpreted as a
       newline. To prevent them from being interpreted, strings can be prefixed with r, e.g. r'...'.

   Operators
       There is a single prefix operator:

       not x

              Changesets not in x. Short form is ! x.

       These are the supported infix operators:

       x::y

              A DAG range, meaning all changesets that are descendants of x and ancestors of y, including x  and
              y themselves. If the first endpoint is left out, this is equivalent to ancestors(y), if the second
              is left out it is equivalent to descendants(x).

              An alternative syntax is x..y.

       x:y

              All changesets with revision numbers between x and y, both inclusive. Either endpoint can be  left
              out, they default to 0 and tip.

       x and y

              The intersection of changesets in x and y. Short form is x & y.

       x or y

              The union of changesets in x and y. There are two alternative short forms: x | y and x + y.

       x - y

              Changesets in x but not in y.

       x % y

              Changesets  that  are  ancestors  of x but not ancestors of y (i.e. ::x - ::y).  This is shorthand
              notation for only(x, y) (see below). The  second  argument  is  optional  and,  if  left  out,  is
              equivalent to only(x).

       x^n

              The  nth  parent  of  x,  n  ==  0,  1, or 2.  For n == 0, x; for n == 1, the first parent of each
              changeset in x; for n == 2, the second parent of changeset in x.

       x~n

              The nth first ancestor of x; x~0 is x; x~3 is x^^^.  For n < 0, the nth unambiguous descendent  of
              x.

       x ## y

              Concatenate strings and identifiers into one string.

              All other prefix, infix and postfix operators have lower priority than ##. For example, a1 ## a2~2
              is equivalent to (a1 ## a2)~2.

              For example:

              [revsetalias]
              issue(a1) = grep(r'\bissue[ :]?' ## a1 ## r'\b|\bbug\(' ## a1 ## r'\)')

              issue(1234) is equivalent to grep(r'\bissue[ :]?1234\b|\bbug\(1234\)') in this case. This  matches
              against all of "issue 1234", "issue:1234", "issue1234" and "bug(1234)".

       There is a single postfix operator:

       x^

              Equivalent to x^1, the first parent of each changeset in x.

   Patterns
       Where  noted,  predicates  that  perform  string matching can accept a pattern string. The pattern may be
       either a literal, or a regular expression. If the pattern starts with re:, the remainder of  the  pattern
       is  treated  as  a  regular  expression.  Otherwise,  it is treated as a literal. To match a pattern that
       actually starts with re:, use the prefix literal:.

       Matching is case-sensitive,  unless  otherwise  noted.   To  perform  a  case-  insensitive  match  on  a
       case-sensitive predicate, use a regular expression, prefixed with (?i).

       For example, tag(r're:(?i)release') matches "release" or "RELEASE" or "Release", etc.

   Predicates
       The following predicates are supported:

       adds(pattern)

              Changesets that add a file matching pattern.

              The  pattern  without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be relative to the current directory
              and match against a file or a directory.

       all()

              All changesets, the same as 0:tip.

       ancestor(*changeset)

              A greatest common ancestor of the changesets.

              Accepts 0 or more changesets.  Will return empty  list  when  passed  no  args.   Greatest  common
              ancestor of a single changeset is that changeset.

       ancestors(set[, depth])

              Changesets that are ancestors of changesets in set, including the given changesets themselves.

              If depth is specified, the result only includes changesets up to the specified generation.

       author(string)

              Alias for user(string).

       bisect(string)

              Changesets marked in the specified bisect status:

              • good, bad, skip: csets explicitly marked as good/bad/skip

              • goods, bads      : csets topologically good/bad

              • range              : csets taking part in the bisection

              • pruned             : csets that are goods, bads or skipped

              • untested           : csets whose fate is yet unknown

              • ignored            : csets ignored due to DAG topology

              • current            : the cset currently being bisected

       bookmark([name])

              The named bookmark or all bookmarks.

              Pattern matching is supported for name. See hg help revisions.patterns.

       branch(string or set)

              All changesets belonging to the given branch or the branches of the given changesets.

              Pattern matching is supported for string. See hg help revisions.patterns.

       branchpoint()

              Changesets with more than one child.

       bundle()

              Changesets in the bundle.

              Bundle must be specified by the -R option.

       children(set)

              Child changesets of changesets in set.

       closed()

              Changeset is closed.

       contains(pattern)

              The  revision's  manifest  contains a file matching pattern (but might not modify it). See hg help
              patterns for information about file patterns.

              The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be relative to the  current  directory
              and match against a file exactly for efficiency.

       converted([id])

              Changesets  converted from the given identifier in the old repository if present, or all converted
              changesets if no identifier is specified.

       date(interval)

              Changesets within the interval, see hg help dates.

       desc(string)

              Search commit message for string. The match is case-insensitive.

              Pattern matching is supported for string. See hg help revisions.patterns.

       descendants(set[, depth])

              Changesets which are descendants of changesets in set, including the given changesets themselves.

              If depth is specified, the result only includes changesets up to the specified generation.

       destination([set])

              Changesets that were created by a graft, transplant or rebase operation, with the given  revisions
              specified as the source.  Omitting the optional set is the same as passing all().

       draft()

              Changeset in draft phase.

       extinct()

              Obsolete changesets with obsolete descendants only.

       extra(label, [value])

              Changesets with the given label in the extra metadata, with the given optional value.

              Pattern matching is supported for value. See hg help revisions.patterns.

       file(pattern)

              Changesets affecting files matched by pattern.

              For a faster but less accurate result, consider using filelog() instead.

              This predicate uses glob: as the default kind of pattern.

       filelog(pattern)

              Changesets connected to the specified filelog.

              For  performance  reasons,  visits only revisions mentioned in the file-level filelog, rather than
              filtering through all changesets (much faster, but doesn't include deletes or duplicate  changes).
              For a slower, more accurate result, use file().

              The  pattern  without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be relative to the current directory
              and match against a file exactly for efficiency.

              If some linkrev points to revisions filtered by the current repoview,  we'll  work  around  it  to
              return a non-filtered value.

       first(set, [n])

              An alias for limit().

       follow([file[, startrev]])

              An  alias  for  ::.  (ancestors  of  the  working  directory's  first parent).  If file pattern is
              specified, the histories of files matching given pattern in the revision  given  by  startrev  are
              followed, including copies.

       followlines(file, fromline:toline[, startrev=., descend=False])

              Changesets modifying file in line range ('fromline', 'toline').

              Line  range  corresponds  to 'file' content at 'startrev' and should hence be consistent with file
              size. If startrev is not specified, working directory's parent is used.

              By default, ancestors of 'startrev' are returned. If 'descend' is True, descendants of  'startrev'
              are returned though renames are (currently) not followed in this direction.

       grep(regex)

              Like keyword(string) but accepts a regex. Use grep(r'...') to ensure special escape characters are
              handled correctly. Unlike keyword(string), the match is case-sensitive.

       head()

              Changeset is a named branch head.

       heads(set)

              Members of set with no children in set.

       hidden()

              Hidden changesets.

       id(string)

              Revision non-ambiguously specified by the given hex string prefix.

       keyword(string)

              Search commit  message,  user  name,  and  names  of  changed  files  for  string.  The  match  is
              case-insensitive.

              For a regular expression or case sensitive search of these fields, use grep(regex).

       last(set, [n])

              Last n members of set, defaulting to 1.

       limit(set[, n[, offset]])

              First n members of set, defaulting to 1, starting from offset.

       matching(revision [, field])

              Changesets in which a given set of fields match the set of fields in the selected revision or set.

              To  match  more  than  one field pass the list of fields to match separated by spaces (e.g. author
              description).

              Valid fields are most regular revision fields and some special fields.

              Regular revision fields are description, author, branch, date, files,  phase,  parents,  substate,
              user  and  diff.   Note  that  author  and  user  are synonyms. diff refers to the contents of the
              revision. Two revisions matching their diff will also match their files.

              Special fields are summary and metadata: summary  matches  the  first  line  of  the  description.
              metadata  is  equivalent  to  matching  description  user  date (i.e. it matches the main metadata
              fields).

              metadata is the default field which is used when no fields are specified. You can match more  than
              one field at a time.

       max(set)

              Changeset with highest revision number in set.

       merge()

              Changeset is a merge changeset.

       min(set)

              Changeset with lowest revision number in set.

       modifies(pattern)

              Changesets modifying files matched by pattern.

              The  pattern  without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be relative to the current directory
              and match against a file or a directory.

       named(namespace)

              The changesets in a given namespace.

              Pattern matching is supported for namespace. See hg help revisions.patterns.

       obsolete()

              Mutable changeset with a newer version.

       only(set, [set])

              Changesets that are ancestors of the first set that are not ancestors of any  other  head  in  the
              repo.  If  a  second  set  is  specified,  the  result  is ancestors of the first set that are not
              ancestors of the second set (i.e. ::<set1> - ::<set2>).

       origin([set])

              Changesets that were specified as a source for the grafts, transplants or rebases that created the
              given  revisions.  Omitting the optional set is the same as passing all().  If a changeset created
              by these operations is itself specified as a source for one of these operations, only  the  source
              changeset for the first operation is selected.

       outgoing([path])

              Changesets not found in the specified destination repository, or the default push location.

       p1([set])

              First parent of changesets in set, or the working directory.

       p2([set])

              Second parent of changesets in set, or the working directory.

       parents([set])

              The set of all parents for all changesets in set, or the working directory.

       present(set)

              An empty set, if any revision in set isn't found; otherwise, all revisions in set.

              If  any  of  specified  revisions  is  not  present in the local repository, the query is normally
              aborted. But this predicate allows the query to continue even in such cases.

       public()

              Changeset in public phase.

       remote([id [,path]])

              Local revision that corresponds to the given identifier in a remote repository, if present.  Here,
              the '.' identifier is a synonym for the current local branch.

       removes(pattern)

              Changesets which remove files matching pattern.

              The  pattern  without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be relative to the current directory
              and match against a file or a directory.

       rev(number)

              Revision with the given numeric identifier.

       reverse(set)

              Reverse order of set.

       roots(set)

              Changesets in set with no parent changeset in set.

       secret()

              Changeset in secret phase.

       sort(set[, [-]key... [, ...]])

              Sort set by keys. The default sort order is ascending, specify a key as -key to sort in descending
              order.

              The keys can be:

              • rev for the revision number,

              • branch for the branch name,

              • desc for the commit message (description),

              • user for user name (author can be used as an alias),

              • date for the commit date

              • topo for a reverse topographical sort

              The  topo  sort  order  cannot  be  combined  with  other  sort keys. This sort takes one optional
              argument, topo.firstbranch, which takes a revset that specifies  what  topographical  branches  to
              prioritize in the sort.

       subrepo([pattern])

              Changesets  that  add,  modify  or  remove the given subrepo.  If no subrepo pattern is named, any
              subrepo changes are returned.

       successors(set)

              All successors for set, including the given set themselves

       tag([name])

              The specified tag by name, or all tagged revisions if no name is given.

              Pattern matching is supported for name. See hg help revisions.patterns.

       user(string)

              User name contains string. The match is case-insensitive.

              Pattern matching is supported for string. See hg help revisions.patterns.

   Aliases
       New predicates (known as "aliases") can be defined, using any combination of existing predicates or other
       aliases. An alias definition looks like:

       <alias> = <definition>

       in  the  revsetalias  section  of  a Mercurial configuration file. Arguments of the form a1, a2, etc. are
       substituted from the alias into the definition.

       For example,

       [revsetalias]
       h = heads()
       d(s) = sort(s, date)
       rs(s, k) = reverse(sort(s, k))

       defines three aliases, h, d, and rs. rs(0:tip,  author)  is  exactly  equivalent  to  reverse(sort(0:tip,
       author)).

   Equivalents
       Command line equivalents for hg log:

       -f    ->  ::.
       -d x  ->  date(x)
       -k x  ->  keyword(x)
       -m    ->  merge()
       -u x  ->  user(x)
       -b x  ->  branch(x)
       -P x  ->  !::x
       -l x  ->  limit(expr, x)

   Examples
       Some sample queries:

       • Changesets on the default branch:

         hg log -r "branch(default)"

       • Changesets on the default branch since tag 1.5 (excluding merges):

         hg log -r "branch(default) and 1.5:: and not merge()"

       • Open branch heads:

         hg log -r "head() and not closed()"

       • Changesets between tags 1.3 and 1.5 mentioning "bug" that affect hgext/*:

         hg log -r "1.3::1.5 and keyword(bug) and file('hgext/*')"

       • Changesets committed in May 2008, sorted by user:

         hg log -r "sort(date('May 2008'), user)"

       • Changesets mentioning "bug" or "issue" that are not in a tagged release:

         hg log -r "(keyword(bug) or keyword(issue)) and not ancestors(tag())"

       • Update  to  the  commit  that  bookmark  @  is pointing to, without activating the bookmark (this works
         because the last revision of the revset is used):

         hg update :@

       • Show diff between tags 1.3 and 1.5 (this works because the first and the last revisions of  the  revset
         are used):

         hg diff -r 1.3::1.5

USING MERCURIAL FROM SCRIPTS AND AUTOMATION

       It is common for machines (as opposed to humans) to consume Mercurial.  This help topic describes some of
       the considerations for interfacing machines with Mercurial.

   Choosing an Interface
       Machines have a choice of several methods to interface with Mercurial.  These include:

       • Executing the hg process

       • Querying a HTTP server

       • Calling out to a command server

       Executing hg processes is very similar to how humans interact with Mercurial  in  the  shell.  It  should
       already be familiar to you.

       hg  serve can  be  used  to  start a server. By default, this will start a "hgweb" HTTP server. This HTTP
       server has support for machine-readable output, such as JSON. For more, see hg help hgweb.

       hg serve can also start a "command server." Clients can  connect  to  this  server  and  issue  Mercurial
       commands  over  a  special  protocol.   For more details on the command server, including links to client
       libraries, see https://www.mercurial-scm.org/wiki/CommandServer.

       hg serve based interfaces (the hgweb and command servers) have  the  advantage  over  simple  hg  process
       invocations  in  that  they  are  likely more efficient. This is because there is significant overhead to
       spawn new Python processes.

       Tip    If you need to invoke several hg processes in short order and/or performance is important to  you,
              use of a server-based interface is highly recommended.

   Environment Variables
       As documented in hg help environment, various environment variables influence the operation of Mercurial.
       The following are particularly relevant for machines consuming Mercurial:

       HGPLAIN
              If not set, Mercurial's output could be influenced  by  configuration  settings  that  impact  its
              encoding, verbose mode, localization, etc.

              It is highly recommended for machines to set this variable when invoking hg processes.

       HGENCODING
              If  not set, the locale used by Mercurial will be detected from the environment. If the determined
              locale does not support display of  certain  characters,  Mercurial  may  render  these  character
              sequences  incorrectly  (often by using "?" as a placeholder for invalid characters in the current
              locale).

              Explicitly setting this environment variable is a good practice to guarantee  consistent  results.
              "utf-8" is a good choice on UNIX-like environments.

       HGRCPATH
              If not set, Mercurial will inherit config options from config files using the process described in
              hg help config. This includes inheriting user or system-wide config files.

              When utmost control over the Mercurial configuration is desired, the value of HGRCPATH can be  set
              to  an explicit file with known good configs. In rare cases, the value can be set to an empty file
              or the null device (often /dev/null) to bypass loading of any user or system  config  files.  Note
              that  these approaches can have unintended consequences, as the user and system config files often
              define things like the  username  and  extensions  that  may  be  required  to  interface  with  a
              repository.

   Command-line Flags
       Mercurial's  default  command-line  parser  is  designed  for humans, and is not robust against malicious
       input. For instance, you can start a debugger by passing --debugger as an option value:

       $ REV=--debugger sh -c 'hg log -r "$REV"'

       This happens because several command-line flags need to be  scanned  without  using  a  concrete  command
       table, which may be modified while loading repository settings and extensions.

       Since  Mercurial 4.4.2, the parsing of such flags may be restricted by setting HGPLAIN=+strictflags. When
       this feature is enabled, all early options (e.g. -R/--repository,  --cwd,  --config)  must  be  specified
       first amongst the other global options, and cannot be injected to an arbitrary location:

       $ HGPLAIN=+strictflags hg -R "$REPO" log -r "$REV"

       In  earlier  Mercurial  versions  where  +strictflags  isn't  available,  you  can  mitigate the issue by
       concatenating an option value with its flag:

       $ hg log -r"$REV" --keyword="$KEYWORD"

   Consuming Command Output
       It is common for machines to need to parse the output of  Mercurial  commands  for  relevant  data.  This
       section describes the various techniques for doing so.

   Parsing Raw Command Output
       Likely  the  simplest  and  most  effective  solution for consuming command output is to simply invoke hg
       commands as you would as a user and parse their output.

       The output of many commands can easily be parsed with tools like grep, sed, and awk.

       A potential downside with parsing command output is that the output of commands can change when Mercurial
       is  upgraded.  While  Mercurial  does generally strive for strong backwards compatibility, command output
       does occasionally change. Having tests for your automated interactions  with  hg  commands  is  generally
       recommended, but is even more important when raw command output parsing is involved.

   Using Templates to Control Output
       Many  hg  commands  support  templatized  output  via  the  -T/--template argument. For more, see hg help
       templates.

       Templates are useful for explicitly controlling output  so  that  you  get  exactly  the  data  you  want
       formatted  how you want it. For example, log -T {node}\n can be used to print a newline delimited list of
       changeset nodes instead of a human-tailored output containing authors, dates, descriptions, etc.

       Tip    If parsing raw command output is too complicated, consider  using  templates  to  make  your  life
              easier.

       The   -T/--template   argument   allows   specifying   pre-defined  styles.   Mercurial  ships  with  the
       machine-readable styles json and xml, which provide JSON and XML output, respectively. These  are  useful
       for producing output that is machine readable as-is.

       Important
              The  json  and  xml  styles  are  considered experimental. While they may be attractive to use for
              easily obtaining machine-readable output, their behavior may change in subsequent versions.

              These styles may also exhibit unexpected results when dealing with  certain  encodings.  Mercurial
              treats  things  like filenames as a series of bytes and normalizing certain byte sequences to JSON
              or XML with certain encoding settings can lead to surprises.

   Command Server Output
       If using the command server to interact with Mercurial, you are likely using an existing library/API that
       abstracts  implementation  details of the command server. If so, this interface layer may perform parsing
       for you, saving you the work of implementing it yourself.

   Output Verbosity
       Commands often have varying output verbosity, even when machine readable styles are being used  (e.g.  -T
       json). Adding -v/--verbose and --debug to the command's arguments can increase the amount of data exposed
       by Mercurial.

       An alternate way to get the data you need is by explicitly specifying a template.

   Other Topics
       revsets
              Revisions sets is a functional query language for selecting a set of revisions. Think of it as SQL
              for Mercurial repositories. Revsets are useful for querying repositories for specific data.

              See hg help revsets for more.

       share extension
              The  share  extension  provides  functionality  for sharing repository data across several working
              copies. It can even automatically "pool" storage for logically related repositories when cloning.

              Configuring  the  share  extension  can  lead  to  significant  resource  utilization   reduction,
              particularly around disk space and the network. This is especially true for continuous integration
              (CI) environments.

              See hg help -e share for more.

SUBREPOSITORIES

       Subrepositories let you nest external repositories or projects into a parent  Mercurial  repository,  and
       make commands operate on them as a group.

       Mercurial currently supports Mercurial, Git, and Subversion subrepositories.

       Subrepositories are made of three components:

       1. Nested repository checkouts. They can appear anywhere in the parent working directory.

       2. Nested  repository  references.  They  are  defined  in  .hgsub, which should be placed in the root of
          working directory, and tell where the subrepository checkouts come from. Mercurial subrepositories are
          referenced like:

          path/to/nested = https://example.com/nested/repo/path

          Git and Subversion subrepos are also supported:

          path/to/nested = [git]git://example.com/nested/repo/path
          path/to/nested = [svn]https://example.com/nested/trunk/path

          where  path/to/nested  is  the  checkout  location  relatively  to  the  parent  Mercurial  root,  and
          https://example.com/nested/repo/path is the source repository path. The source can  also  reference  a
          filesystem path.

          Note that .hgsub does not exist by default in Mercurial repositories, you have to create and add it to
          the parent repository before using subrepositories.

       3. Nested repository states. They are defined in .hgsubstate, which is placed  in  the  root  of  working
          directory,  and  capture  whatever information is required to restore the subrepositories to the state
          they were committed in a parent  repository  changeset.  Mercurial  automatically  record  the  nested
          repositories states when committing in the parent repository.

       Note
          The .hgsubstate file should not be edited manually.

   Adding a Subrepository
       If  .hgsub  does not exist, create it and add it to the parent repository. Clone or checkout the external
       projects where you want it to live in the parent repository. Edit .hgsub and add the subrepository  entry
       as described above. At this point, the subrepository is tracked and the next commit will record its state
       in .hgsubstate and bind it to the committed changeset.

   Synchronizing a Subrepository
       Subrepos do not automatically track the latest changeset of their sources. Instead, they are  updated  to
       the  changeset  that  corresponds  with  the changeset checked out in the top-level changeset. This is so
       developers always get a consistent set of compatible code and libraries when they update.

       Thus, updating subrepos is a manual process. Simply check out target subrepo  at  the  desired  revision,
       test in the top-level repo, then commit in the parent repository to record the new combination.

   Deleting a Subrepository
       To  remove  a subrepository from the parent repository, delete its reference from .hgsub, then remove its
       files.

   Interaction with Mercurial Commands
       add    add does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is specified.  However, if you  specify  the
              full  path  of  a  file  in  a  subrepo,  it  will  be added even without -S/--subrepos specified.
              Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ignored.

       addremove
              addremove does not recurse into subrepos unless  -S/--subrepos  is  specified.   However,  if  you
              specify  the full path of a directory in a subrepo, addremove will be performed on it even without
              -S/--subrepos being specified.  Git and  Subversion  subrepositories  will  print  a  warning  and
              continue.

       archive
              archive does not recurse in subrepositories unless -S/--subrepos is specified.

       cat    Git  subrepositories  only  support  exact file matches.  Subversion subrepositories are currently
              ignored.

       commit commit creates a consistent snapshot of the state of the entire project and  its  subrepositories.
              If any subrepositories have been modified, Mercurial will abort.  Mercurial can be made to instead
              commit   all    modified    subrepositories    by    specifying    -S/--subrepos,    or    setting
              "ui.commitsubrepos=True"  in a configuration file (see hg help config).  After there are no longer
              any modified subrepositories, it records  their  state  and  finally  commits  it  in  the  parent
              repository.   The  --addremove  option  also  honors  the  -S/--subrepos option.  However, Git and
              Subversion subrepositories will print a warning and abort.

       diff   diff does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is  specified.  Changes  are  displayed  as
              usual, on the subrepositories elements. Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ignored.

       files  files  does  not recurse into subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is specified.  However, if you specify
              the full path of a file or directory in a subrepo, it will be displayed even without -S/--subrepos
              being specified.  Git and Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ignored.

       forget forget  currently only handles exact file matches in subrepos.  Git and Subversion subrepositories
              are currently silently ignored.

       incoming
              incoming does not recurse in subrepos  unless  -S/--subrepos  is  specified.  Git  and  Subversion
              subrepositories are currently silently ignored.

       outgoing
              outgoing  does  not  recurse  in  subrepos  unless  -S/--subrepos is specified. Git and Subversion
              subrepositories are currently silently ignored.

       pull   pull is not recursive since it is not clear what to pull prior to running hg update.  Listing  and
              retrieving  all  subrepositories  changes referenced by the parent repository pulled changesets is
              expensive at best, impossible in the Subversion case.

       push   Mercurial will automatically push all subrepositories first when the parent  repository  is  being
              pushed.  This  ensures  new  subrepository  changes  are  available  when  referenced by top-level
              repositories.  Push is a no-op for Subversion subrepositories.

       serve  serve does not recurse into subrepositories unless -S/--subrepos is specified.  Git and Subversion
              subrepositories are currently silently ignored.

       status status  does  not  recurse  into  subrepositories unless -S/--subrepos is specified. Subrepository
              changes are displayed as regular Mercurial  changes  on  the  subrepository  elements.  Subversion
              subrepositories are currently silently ignored.

       remove remove  does  not recurse into subrepositories unless -S/--subrepos is specified.  However, if you
              specify a file or directory path in a subrepo, it will be removed even without -S/--subrepos.  Git
              and Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ignored.

       update update  restores  the subrepos in the state they were originally committed in target changeset. If
              the recorded changeset is not available in the current subrepository, Mercurial will  pull  it  in
              first  before  updating.   This  means  that  updating  can  require  network  access  when  using
              subrepositories.

   Remapping Subrepositories Sources
       A subrepository source location may change during a project life, invalidating references stored  in  the
       parent  repository history. To fix this, rewriting rules can be defined in parent repository hgrc file or
       in Mercurial configuration. See the [subpaths] section in hgrc(5) for more details.

TEMPLATE USAGE

       Mercurial allows you to customize output of commands through templates. You can either pass in a template
       or select an existing template-style from the command line, via the --template option.

       You can customize output for any "log-like" command: log, outgoing, incoming, tip, parents, and heads.

       Some  built-in  styles  are  packaged  with  Mercurial.  These can be listed with hg log --template list.
       Example usage:

       $ hg log -r1.0::1.1 --template changelog

       A template is a piece of text, with markup to invoke variable expansion:

       $ hg log -r1 --template "{node}\n"
       b56ce7b07c52de7d5fd79fb89701ea538af65746

   Keywords
       Strings in curly braces are called keywords. The availability of keywords depends on the exact context of
       the templater. These keywords are usually available for templating a log-like command:

       activebookmark
              String. The active bookmark, if it is associated with the changeset.

       author String. The unmodified author of the changeset.

       bisect String. The changeset bisection status.

       bookmarks
              List  of strings. Any bookmarks associated with the changeset. Also sets 'active', the name of the
              active bookmark.

       branch String. The name of the branch on which the changeset was committed.

       changessincelatesttag
              Integer. All ancestors not in the latest tag.

       children
              List of strings. The children of the changeset.

       date   Date information. The date when the changeset was committed.

       desc   String. The text of the changeset description.

       diffstat
              String. Statistics of changes with the following format: "modified files: +added/-removed lines"

       extras List of dicts with key, value entries of the 'extras' field of this changeset.

       file_adds
              List of strings. Files added by this changeset.

       file_copies
              List of strings. Files copied in this changeset with their sources.

       file_copies_switch
              List of strings. Like "file_copies" but displayed only if the --copied switch is set.

       file_dels
              List of strings. Files removed by this changeset.

       file_mods
              List of strings. Files modified by this changeset.

       files  List of strings. All files modified, added, or removed by this changeset.

       graphnode
              String. The character representing the changeset node in an ASCII revision graph.

       graphwidth
              Integer. The width of the graph drawn by 'log --graph' or zero.

       index  Integer. The current iteration of the loop. (0 indexed)

       latesttag
              List of strings. The global tags on the most recent globally tagged ancestor  of  this  changeset.
              If no such tags exist, the list consists of the single string "null".

       latesttagdistance
              Integer. Longest path to the latest tag.

       namespaces
              Dict of lists. Names attached to this changeset per namespace.

       node   String. The changeset identification hash, as a 40 hexadecimal digit string.

       p1node String. The identification hash of the changeset's first parent, as a 40 digit hexadecimal string.
              If the changeset has no parents, all digits are 0.

       p1rev  Integer. The repository-local revision number of the  changeset's  first  parent,  or  -1  if  the
              changeset has no parents.

       p2node String.  The  identification  hash  of  the  changeset's  second parent, as a 40 digit hexadecimal
              string. If the changeset has no second parent, all digits are 0.

       p2rev  Integer. The repository-local revision number of the changeset's  second  parent,  or  -1  if  the
              changeset has no second parent.

       parents
              List  of strings. The parents of the changeset in "rev:node" format. If the changeset has only one
              "natural" parent (the predecessor revision) nothing is shown.

       peerurls
              A dictionary of repository locations defined in the [paths] section of your configuration file.

       phase  String. The changeset phase name.

       rev    Integer. The repository-local changeset revision number.

       subrepos
              List of strings. Updated subrepositories in the changeset.

       tags   List of strings. Any tags associated with the changeset.

       termwidth
              Integer. The width of the current terminal.

       verbosity
              String. The current output verbosity in 'debug', 'quiet', 'verbose', or ''.

       The "date" keyword does not produce human-readable output. If you want to use a date in your output,  you
       can  use a filter to process it. Filters are functions which return a string based on the input variable.
       Be sure to use the stringify filter first when you're applying a string-input filter to a list-like input
       variable.  You can also use a chain of filters to get the desired output:

       $ hg tip --template "{date|isodate}\n"
       2008-08-21 18:22 +0000

   Filters
       List of filters:

       addbreaks
              Any text. Add an XHTML "<br />" tag before the end of every line except the last.

       age    Date.  Returns  a  human-readable date/time difference between the given date/time and the current
              date/time.

       basename
              Any text. Treats the text as a path, and returns the last component of the path after splitting by
              the path separator.  For example, "foo/bar/baz" becomes "baz" and "foo/bar//" becomes "".

       count  List or text. Returns the length as an integer.

       domain Any  text.  Finds  the first string that looks like an email address, and extracts just the domain
              component. Example: User <user@example.com> becomes example.com.

       email  Any  text.  Extracts  the  first  string  that  looks  like  an  email  address.   Example:   User
              <user@example.com> becomes user@example.com.

       emailuser
              Any text. Returns the user portion of an email address.

       escape Any  text.  Replaces  the  special  XML/XHTML  characters  "&", "<" and ">" with XML entities, and
              filters out NUL characters.

       fill68 Any text. Wraps the text to fit in 68 columns.

       fill76 Any text. Wraps the text to fit in 76 columns.

       firstline
              Any text. Returns the first line of text.

       hex    Any text. Convert a binary Mercurial node identifier into its long hexadecimal representation.

       hgdate Date. Returns the date as a pair of numbers: "1157407993 25200" (Unix timestamp, timezone offset).

       isodate
              Date. Returns the date in ISO 8601 format: "2009-08-18 13:00 +0200".

       isodatesec
              Date. Returns the date in ISO 8601 format, including seconds:  "2009-08-18  13:00:13  +0200".  See
              also the rfc3339date filter.

       lower  Any text. Converts the text to lowercase.

       nonempty
              Any text. Returns '(none)' if the string is empty.

       obfuscate
              Any text. Returns the input text rendered as a sequence of XML entities.

       person Any text. Returns the name before an email address, interpreting it as per RFC 5322.

       revescape
              Any  text.  Escapes  all  "special"  characters,  except  @.  Forward slashes are escaped twice to
              prevent web servers  from  prematurely  unescaping  them.  For  example,  "@foo  bar/baz"  becomes
              "@foo%20bar%252Fbaz".

       rfc3339date
              Date.   Returns   a   date   using   the   Internet   date   format   specified   in   RFC   3339:
              "2009-08-18T13:00:13+02:00".

       rfc822date
              Date. Returns a date using the same format used in email  headers:  "Tue,  18  Aug  2009  13:00:13
              +0200".

       short  Changeset hash. Returns the short form of a changeset hash, i.e. a 12 hexadecimal digit string.

       shortbisect
              Any  text.  Treats  text  as  a  bisection status, and returns a single-character representing the
              status (G: good, B: bad, S: skipped, U: untested, I: ignored). Returns single space if text is not
              a valid bisection status.

       shortdate
              Date. Returns a date like "2006-09-18".

       slashpath
              Any text. Replaces the native path separator with slash.

       splitlines
              Any text. Split text into a list of lines.

       stringify
              Any type. Turns the value into text by converting values into text and concatenating them.

       stripdir
              Treat  the text as path and strip a directory level, if possible. For example, "foo" and "foo/bar"
              becomes "foo".

       tabindent
              Any text. Returns the text, with every non-empty  line  except  the  first  starting  with  a  tab
              character.

       upper  Any text. Converts the text to uppercase.

       urlescape
              Any text. Escapes all "special" characters. For example, "foo bar" becomes "foo%20bar".

       user   Any text. Returns a short representation of a user name or email address.

       utf8   Any text. Converts from the local character encoding to UTF-8.

       Note that a filter is nothing more than a function call, i.e.  expr|filter is equivalent to filter(expr).

   Functions
       In addition to filters, there are some basic built-in functions:

       date(date[, fmt])
              Format  a  date.  See  hg  help  dates for  formatting strings. The default is a Unix date format,
              including the timezone: "Mon Sep 04 15:13:13 2006 0700".

       dict([[key=]value...])
              Construct a dict from key-value pairs. A key may be omitted if a value expression can  provide  an
              unambiguous name.

       diff([includepattern [, excludepattern]])
              Show a diff, optionally specifying files to include or exclude.

       files(pattern)
              All files of the current changeset matching the pattern. See hg help patterns.

       fill(text[, width[, initialident[, hangindent]]])
              Fill many paragraphs with optional indentation. See the "fill" filter.

       get(dict, key)
              Get  an attribute/key from an object. Some keywords are complex types. This function allows you to
              obtain the value of an attribute on these types.

       if(expr, then[, else])
              Conditionally execute based on the result of an expression.

       ifcontains(needle, haystack, then[, else])
              Conditionally execute based on whether the item "needle" is in "haystack".

       ifeq(expr1, expr2, then[, else])
              Conditionally execute based on whether 2 items are equivalent.

       indent(text, indentchars[, firstline])
              Indents all non-empty lines with the characters given in the indentchars string. An optional third
              parameter will override the indent for the first line only if present.

       join(list, sep)
              Join items in a list with a delimiter.

       label(label, expr)
              Apply  a  label  to  generated  content.  Content  with  a  label applied can result in additional
              post-processing, such as automatic colorization.

       latesttag([pattern])
              The global tags matching the given pattern on the most recent globally  tagged  ancestor  of  this
              changeset.  If no such tags exist, the "{tag}" template resolves to the string "null".

       localdate(date[, tz])
              Converts a date to the specified timezone.  The default is local date.

       max(iterable)
              Return the max of an iterable

       min(iterable)
              Return the min of an iterable

       mod(a, b)
              Calculate a mod b such that a / b + a mod b == a

       pad(text, width[, fillchar=' '[, left=False]])
              Pad text with a fill character.

       relpath(path)
              Convert  a  repository-absolute  path  into  a  filesystem  path  relative  to the current working
              directory.

       revset(query[, formatargs...])
              Execute a revision set query. See hg help revset.

       rstdoc(text, style)
              Format reStructuredText.

       separate(sep, args)
              Add a separator between non-empty arguments.

       shortest(node, minlength=4)
              Obtain the shortest representation of a node.

       startswith(pattern, text)
              Returns the value from the "text" argument if it  begins  with  the  content  from  the  "pattern"
              argument.

       strip(text[, chars])
              Strip characters from a string. By default, strips all leading and trailing whitespace.

       sub(pattern, replacement, expression)
              Perform text substitution using regular expressions.

       word(number, text[, separator])
              Return the nth word from a string.

   Operators
       We provide a limited set of infix arithmetic operations on integers:

       + for addition
       - for subtraction
       * for multiplication
       / for floor division (division rounded to integer nearest -infinity)

       Division fulfills the law x = x / y + mod(x, y).

       Also, for any expression that returns a list, there is a list operator:

       expr % "{template}"

       As  seen  in  the  above  example,  {template}  is  interpreted  as a template.  To prevent it from being
       interpreted, you can use an escape character \{ or a raw string prefix, r'...'.

       The dot operator can be used as a shorthand for accessing a sub item:

       • expr.member is roughly equivalent to expr % '{member}' if expr returns a  non-list/dict.  The  returned
         value is not stringified.

       • dict.key is identical to get(dict, 'key').

   Aliases
       New keywords and functions can be defined in the templatealias section of a Mercurial configuration file:

       <alias> = <definition>

       Arguments of the form a1, a2, etc. are substituted from the alias into the definition.

       For example,

       [templatealias]
       r = rev
       rn = "{r}:{node|short}"
       leftpad(s, w) = pad(s, w, ' ', True)

       defines two symbol aliases, r and rn, and a function alias leftpad().

       It's  also possible to specify complete template strings, using the templates section. The syntax used is
       the general template string syntax.

       For example,

       [templates]
       nodedate = "{node|short}: {date(date, "%Y-%m-%d")}\n"

       defines a template, nodedate, which can be called like:

       $ hg log -r . -Tnodedate

       A template defined in templates section can also be referenced from another template:

       $ hg log -r . -T "{rev} {nodedate}"

       but be aware that the keywords cannot be overridden by templates. For  example,  a  template  defined  as
       templates.rev cannot be referenced as {rev}.

       A  template  defined  in templates section may have sub templates which are inserted before/after/between
       items:

       [templates]
       myjson = ' {dict(rev, node|short)|json}'
       myjson:docheader = '\{\n'
       myjson:docfooter = '\n}\n'
       myjson:separator = ',\n'

   Examples
       Some sample command line templates:

       • Format lists, e.g. files:

         $ hg log -r 0 --template "files:\n{files % '  {file}\n'}"

       • Join the list of files with a ", ":

         $ hg log -r 0 --template "files: {join(files, ', ')}\n"

       • Join the list of files ending with ".py" with a ", ":

         $ hg log -r 0 --template "pythonfiles: {join(files('**.py'), ', ')}\n"

       • Separate non-empty arguments by a " ":

         $ hg log -r 0 --template "{separate(' ', node, bookmarks, tags}\n"

       • Modify each line of a commit description:

         $ hg log --template "{splitlines(desc) % '**** {line}\n'}"

       • Format date:

         $ hg log -r 0 --template "{date(date, '%Y')}\n"

       • Display date in UTC:

         $ hg log -r 0 --template "{localdate(date, 'UTC')|date}\n"

       • Output the description set to a fill-width of 30:

         $ hg log -r 0 --template "{fill(desc, 30)}"

       • Use a conditional to test for the default branch:

         $ hg log -r 0 --template "{ifeq(branch, 'default', 'on the main branch',
         'on branch {branch}')}\n"

       • Append a newline if not empty:

         $ hg tip --template "{if(author, '{author}\n')}"

       • Label the output for use with the color extension:

         $ hg log -r 0 --template "{label('changeset.{phase}', node|short)}\n"

       • Invert the firstline filter, i.e. everything but the first line:

         $ hg log -r 0 --template "{sub(r'^.*\n?\n?', '', desc)}\n"

       • Display the contents of the 'extra' field, one per line:

         $ hg log -r 0 --template "{join(extras, '\n')}\n"

       • Mark the active bookmark with '*':

         $ hg log --template "{bookmarks % '{bookmark}{ifeq(bookmark, active, '*')} '}\n"

       • Find the previous release candidate tag, the distance and changes since the tag:

         $ hg log -r . --template "{latesttag('re:^.*-rc$') % '{tag}, {changes}, {distance}'}\n"

       • Mark the working copy parent with '@':

         $ hg log --template "{ifcontains(rev, revset('.'), '@')}\n"

       • Show details of parent revisions:

         $ hg log --template "{revset('parents(%d)', rev) % '{desc|firstline}\n'}"

       • Show only commit descriptions that start with "template":

         $ hg log --template "{startswith('template', firstline(desc))}\n"

       • Print the first word of each line of a commit message:

         $ hg log --template "{word(0, desc)}\n"

URL PATHS

       Valid URLs are of the form:

       local/filesystem/path[#revision]
       file://local/filesystem/path[#revision]
       http://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]/[path][#revision]
       https://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]/[path][#revision]
       ssh://[user@]host[:port]/[path][#revision]

       Paths in the local filesystem can either point to Mercurial repositories or to bundle files  (as  created
       by hg bundle or hg incoming --bundle). See also hg help paths.

       An  optional  identifier  after # indicates a particular branch, tag, or changeset to use from the remote
       repository. See also hg help revisions.

       Some features, such as pushing  to  http:// and  https:// URLs  are  only  possible  if  the  feature  is
       explicitly enabled on the remote Mercurial server.

       Note that the security of HTTPS URLs depends on proper configuration of web.cacerts.

       Some notes about using SSH with Mercurial:

       • SSH requires an accessible shell account on the destination machine and a copy of hg in the remote path
         or specified with remotecmd.

       • path is relative to the remote user's home directory by default. Use an extra slash at the start  of  a
         path to specify an absolute path:

         ssh://example.com//tmp/repository

       • Mercurial  doesn't  use  its  own compression via SSH; the right thing to do is to configure it in your
         ~/.ssh/config, e.g.:

         Host *.mylocalnetwork.example.com
           Compression no
         Host *
           Compression yes

         Alternatively specify "ssh -C" as your ssh command in your configuration file or with the --ssh command
         line option.

       These  URLs can all be stored in your configuration file with path aliases under the [paths] section like
       so:

       [paths]
       alias1 = URL1
       alias2 = URL2
       ...

       You can then use the alias for any command that uses a URL (for example hg pull alias1 will be treated as
       hg pull URL1).

       Two  path  aliases  are  special  because  they are used as defaults when you do not provide the URL to a
       command:

       default:
              When you create a repository with hg clone, the clone command saves the  location  of  the  source
              repository as the new repository's 'default' path. This is then used when you omit path from push-
              and pull-like commands (including incoming and outgoing).

       default-push:
              The push command will look for a path named 'default-push', and prefer it over 'default'  if  both
              are defined.

EXTENSIONS

       This  section  contains  help for extensions that are distributed together with Mercurial. Help for other
       extensions is available in the help system.

   acl
       hooks for controlling repository access

       This hook makes it possible to allow or deny write access to given branches and  paths  of  a  repository
       when receiving incoming changesets via pretxnchangegroup and pretxncommit.

       The  authorization is matched based on the local user name on the system where the hook runs, and not the
       committer of the original changeset (since the latter is merely informative).

       The acl hook is best used along with a restricted shell like hgsh, preventing authenticating  users  from
       doing anything other than pushing or pulling. The hook is not safe to use if users have interactive shell
       access, as they can then disable the hook. Nor is it safe if remote users share an account, because  then
       there is no way to distinguish them.

       The order in which access checks are performed is:

       1. Deny  list for branches (section acl.deny.branches)

       2. Allow list for branches (section acl.allow.branches)

       3. Deny  list for paths    (section acl.deny)

       4. Allow list for paths    (section acl.allow)

       The allow and deny sections take key-value pairs.

   Branch-based Access Control
       Use  the  acl.deny.branches  and acl.allow.branches sections to have branch-based access control. Keys in
       these sections can be either:

       • a branch name, or

       • an asterisk, to match any branch;

       The corresponding values can be either:

       • a comma-separated list containing users and groups, or

       • an asterisk, to match anyone;

       You can add the "!" prefix to a user or group name to invert the sense of the match.

   Path-based Access Control
       Use the acl.deny and acl.allow sections to have path-based access control. Keys in these sections  accept
       a subtree pattern (with a glob syntax by default). The corresponding values follow the same syntax as the
       other sections above.

   Groups
       Group names must be prefixed with an @ symbol. Specifying a group name has the same effect as  specifying
       all the users in that group.

       You  can  define  group  members  in  the  acl.groups section.  If a group name is not defined there, and
       Mercurial is running under a Unix-like system, the list of users will be taken from the  OS.   Otherwise,
       an exception will be raised.

   Example Configuration
       [hooks]

       # Use this if you want to check access restrictions at commit time
       pretxncommit.acl = python:hgext.acl.hook

       # Use this if you want to check access restrictions for pull, push,
       # bundle and serve.
       pretxnchangegroup.acl = python:hgext.acl.hook

       [acl]
       # Allow or deny access for incoming changes only if their source is
       # listed here, let them pass otherwise. Source is "serve" for all
       # remote access (http or ssh), "push", "pull" or "bundle" when the
       # related commands are run locally.
       # Default: serve
       sources = serve

       [acl.deny.branches]

       # Everyone is denied to the frozen branch:
       frozen-branch = *

       # A bad user is denied on all branches:
       * = bad-user

       [acl.allow.branches]

       # A few users are allowed on branch-a:
       branch-a = user-1, user-2, user-3

       # Only one user is allowed on branch-b:
       branch-b = user-1

       # The super user is allowed on any branch:
       * = super-user

       # Everyone is allowed on branch-for-tests:
       branch-for-tests = *

       [acl.deny]
       # This list is checked first. If a match is found, acl.allow is not
       # checked. All users are granted access if acl.deny is not present.
       # Format for both lists: glob pattern = user, ..., @group, ...

       # To match everyone, use an asterisk for the user:
       # my/glob/pattern = *

       # user6 will not have write access to any file:
       ** = user6

       # Group "hg-denied" will not have write access to any file:
       ** = @hg-denied

       # Nobody will be able to change "DONT-TOUCH-THIS.txt", despite
       # everyone being able to change all other files. See below.
       src/main/resources/DONT-TOUCH-THIS.txt = *

       [acl.allow]
       # if acl.allow is not present, all users are allowed by default
       # empty acl.allow = no users allowed

       # User "doc_writer" has write access to any file under the "docs"
       # folder:
       docs/** = doc_writer

       # User "jack" and group "designers" have write access to any file
       # under the "images" folder:
       images/** = jack, @designers

       # Everyone (except for "user6" and "@hg-denied" - see acl.deny above)
       # will have write access to any file under the "resources" folder
       # (except for 1 file. See acl.deny):
       src/main/resources/** = *

       .hgtags = release_engineer

   Examples using the ! prefix
       Suppose  there's a branch that only a given user (or group) should be able to push to, and you don't want
       to restrict access to any other branch that may be created.

       The "!" prefix allows you to prevent anyone except a given user or group to push changesets  in  a  given
       branch or path.

       In  the  examples  below,  we  will:  1) Deny access to branch "ring" to anyone but user "gollum" 2) Deny
       access to branch "lake" to anyone but members of the group "hobbit" 3) Deny access to a  file  to  anyone
       but user "gollum"

       [acl.allow.branches]
       # Empty

       [acl.deny.branches]

       # 1) only 'gollum' can commit to branch 'ring';
       # 'gollum' and anyone else can still commit to any other branch.
       ring = !gollum

       # 2) only members of the group 'hobbit' can commit to branch 'lake';
       # 'hobbit' members and anyone else can still commit to any other branch.
       lake = !@hobbit

       # You can also deny access based on file paths:

       [acl.allow]
       # Empty

       [acl.deny]
       # 3) only 'gollum' can change the file below;
       # 'gollum' and anyone else can still change any other file.
       /misty/mountains/cave/ring = !gollum

   amend
       provide the amend command (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This extension provides an amend command that is similar to commit --amend but does not prompt an editor.

   Commands
   amend
       amend the working copy parent with all or specified outstanding changes:

       hg amend [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Similar  to  hg  commit  --amend, but reuse the commit message without invoking editor, unless --edit was
       set.

       See hg help commit for more details.

       Options:

       -A, --addremove
              mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -i, --interactive
              use interactive mode

       -n,--note <VALUE>
              store a note on the amend

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
              read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
              record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
              record the specified user as committer

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   automv
       check for unrecorded moves at commit time (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This extension checks at commit/amend time if any of the committed files comes from an unrecorded mv.

       The threshold at which a file is considered a move can be set with the automv.similarity  config  option.
       This option takes a percentage between 0 (disabled) and 100 (files must be identical), the default is 95.

   blackbox
       log repository events to a blackbox for debugging

       Logs  event  information  to  .hg/blackbox.log  to help debug and diagnose problems.  The events that get
       logged can be configured via the blackbox.track config key.

       Examples:

       [blackbox]
       track = *
       # dirty is *EXPENSIVE* (slow);
       # each log entry indicates `+` if the repository is dirty, like :hg:`id`.
       dirty = True
       # record the source of log messages
       logsource = True

       [blackbox]
       track = command, commandfinish, commandexception, exthook, pythonhook

       [blackbox]
       track = incoming

       [blackbox]
       # limit the size of a log file
       maxsize = 1.5 MB
       # rotate up to N log files when the current one gets too big
       maxfiles = 3

   Commands
   blackbox
       view the recent repository events:

       hg blackbox [OPTION]...

       view the recent repository events

       Options:

       -l,--limit <VALUE>
              the number of events to show (default: 10)

   bugzilla
       hooks for integrating with the Bugzilla bug tracker

       This hook extension adds comments on bugs in Bugzilla when changesets that refer to bugs by  Bugzilla  ID
       are seen. The comment is formatted using the Mercurial template mechanism.

       The  bug  references can optionally include an update for Bugzilla of the hours spent working on the bug.
       Bugs can also be marked fixed.

       Four basic modes of access to Bugzilla are provided:

       1. Access via the Bugzilla REST-API. Requires bugzilla 5.0 or later.

       2. Access via the Bugzilla XMLRPC interface. Requires Bugzilla 3.4 or later.

       3. Check data via the Bugzilla XMLRPC interface and  submit  bug  change  via  email  to  Bugzilla  email
          interface. Requires Bugzilla 3.4 or later.

       4. Writing  directly  to  the  Bugzilla  database. Only Bugzilla installations using MySQL are supported.
          Requires Python MySQLdb.

       Writing directly to the database is susceptible to schema changes,  and  relies  on  a  Bugzilla  contrib
       script  to  send out bug change notification emails. This script runs as the user running Mercurial, must
       be run on the host with the Bugzilla install, and requires  permission  to  read  Bugzilla  configuration
       details  and  the  necessary MySQL user and password to have full access rights to the Bugzilla database.
       For these reasons this access mode is now considered deprecated, and will not be updated for new Bugzilla
       versions going forward. Only adding comments is supported in this access mode.

       Access  via  XMLRPC needs a Bugzilla username and password to be specified in the configuration. Comments
       are added under that username. Since the configuration must be readable by all  Mercurial  users,  it  is
       recommended  that  the  rights  of  that  user are restricted in Bugzilla to the minimum necessary to add
       comments. Marking bugs fixed requires Bugzilla 4.0 and later.

       Access via XMLRPC/email uses XMLRPC to query Bugzilla, but sends email to the Bugzilla email interface to
       submit  comments  to  bugs.   The From: address in the email is set to the email address of the Mercurial
       user, so the comment appears to come from the Mercurial user. In the event that the Mercurial user  email
       is not recognized by Bugzilla as a Bugzilla user, the email associated with the Bugzilla username used to
       log into Bugzilla is used instead as the source of the comment. Marking bugs fixed works on all supported
       Bugzilla versions.

       Access  via  the  REST-API  needs  either  a Bugzilla username and password or an apikey specified in the
       configuration. Comments are made under the given username or the  user  associated  with  the  apikey  in
       Bugzilla.

       Configuration items common to all access modes:

       bugzilla.version
              The access type to use. Values recognized are:

              restapi

                     Bugzilla REST-API, Bugzilla 5.0 and later.

              xmlrpc

                     Bugzilla XMLRPC interface.

              xmlrpc+email

                     Bugzilla XMLRPC and email interfaces.

              3.0

                     MySQL access, Bugzilla 3.0 and later.

              2.18

                     MySQL access, Bugzilla 2.18 and up to but not including 3.0.

              2.16

                     MySQL access, Bugzilla 2.16 and up to but not including 2.18.

       bugzilla.regexp
              Regular  expression  to match bug IDs for update in changeset commit message.  It must contain one
              "()" named group <ids> containing the bug IDs separated  by  non-digit  characters.  It  may  also
              contain  a named group <hours> with a floating-point number giving the hours worked on the bug. If
              no named groups are present, the first "()" group is assumed to contain the bug IDs, and work time
              is  not  updated.  The  default  expression  matches Bug 1234, Bug no. 1234, Bug number 1234, Bugs
              1234,5678, Bug 1234 and 5678 and variations thereof, followed by an hours number prefixed by h  or
              hours, e.g. hours 1.5. Matching is case insensitive.

       bugzilla.fixregexp
              Regular  expression  to  match  bug  IDs  for marking fixed in changeset commit message. This must
              contain a "()" named group <ids>` containing the bug IDs separated by non-digit characters. It may
              also  contain  a named group ``<hours> with a floating-point number giving the hours worked on the
              bug. If no named groups are present, the first "()" group is assumed to contain the bug  IDs,  and
              work  time  is  not updated. The default expression matches Fixes 1234, Fixes bug 1234, Fixes bugs
              1234,5678, Fixes 1234 and 5678 and variations thereof, followed by an hours number prefixed  by  h
              or hours, e.g. hours 1.5. Matching is case insensitive.

       bugzilla.fixstatus
              The status to set a bug to when marking fixed. Default RESOLVED.

       bugzilla.fixresolution
              The resolution to set a bug to when marking fixed. Default FIXED.

       bugzilla.style
              The style file to use when formatting comments.

       bugzilla.template
              Template  to  use when formatting comments. Overrides style if specified. In addition to the usual
              Mercurial keywords, the extension specifies:

              {bug}

                     The Bugzilla bug ID.

              {root}

                     The full pathname of the Mercurial repository.

              {webroot}

                     Stripped pathname of the Mercurial repository.

              {hgweb}

                     Base URL for browsing Mercurial repositories.

              Default changeset {node|short} in repo {root} refers to bug {bug}.\ndetails:\n\t{desc|tabindent}

       bugzilla.strip
              The number of path separator characters to strip from the front of the Mercurial  repository  path
              ({root}   in   templates)   to   produce   {webroot}.   For  example,  a  repository  with  {root}
              /var/local/my-project with a strip of 2 gives a value for {webroot} of my-project. Default 0.

       web.baseurl
              Base URL for browsing Mercurial repositories. Referenced from templates as {hgweb}.

       Configuration items common to XMLRPC+email and MySQL access modes:

       bugzilla.usermap
              Path of file containing Mercurial committer email to Bugzilla user email mappings.  If  specified,
              the file should contain one mapping per line:

              committer = Bugzilla user

              See also the [usermap] section.

       The  [usermap]  section  is used to specify mappings of Mercurial committer email to Bugzilla user email.
       See also bugzilla.usermap.  Contains entries of the form committer = Bugzilla user.

       XMLRPC and REST-API access mode configuration:

       bugzilla.bzurl
              The base URL for the Bugzilla installation.  Default http://localhost/bugzilla.

       bugzilla.user
              The username to use to log into Bugzilla via XMLRPC. Default bugs.

       bugzilla.password
              The password for Bugzilla login.

       REST-API access mode uses the options listed above as well as:

       bugzilla.apikey
              An apikey generated on the Bugzilla instance for api access.  Using an apikey removes the need  to
              store the user and password options.

       XMLRPC+email access mode uses the XMLRPC access mode configuration items, and also:

       bugzilla.bzemail
              The Bugzilla email address.

       In  addition, the Mercurial email settings must be configured. See the documentation in hgrc(5), sections
       [email] and [smtp].

       MySQL access mode configuration:

       bugzilla.host
              Hostname of the MySQL server holding the Bugzilla database.  Default localhost.

       bugzilla.db
              Name of the Bugzilla database in MySQL. Default bugs.

       bugzilla.user
              Username to use to access MySQL server. Default bugs.

       bugzilla.password
              Password to use to access MySQL server.

       bugzilla.timeout
              Database connection timeout (seconds). Default 5.

       bugzilla.bzuser
              Fallback Bugzilla user name to record comments with, if changeset committer cannot be found  as  a
              Bugzilla user.

       bugzilla.bzdir
              Bugzilla install directory. Used by default notify. Default /var/www/html/bugzilla.

       bugzilla.notify
              The  command to run to get Bugzilla to send bug change notification emails. Substitutes from a map
              with 3 keys, bzdir, id (bug id) and user (committer bugzilla email). Default depends  on  version;
              from 2.18 it is "cd %(bzdir)s && perl -T contrib/sendbugmail.pl %(id)s %(user)s".

       Activating the extension:

       [extensions]
       bugzilla =

       [hooks]
       # run bugzilla hook on every change pulled or pushed in here
       incoming.bugzilla = python:hgext.bugzilla.hook

       Example configurations:

       XMLRPC  example  configuration.  This  uses the Bugzilla at http://my-project.org/bugzilla, logging in as
       user bugmail@my-project.org with password plugh. It is used with a collection of  Mercurial  repositories
       in /var/local/hg/repos/, with a web interface at http://my-project.org/hg.

       [bugzilla]
       bzurl=http://my-project.org/bugzilla
       user=bugmail@my-project.org
       password=plugh
       version=xmlrpc
       template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}.
                {hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n
                {desc}\n
       strip=5

       [web]
       baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg

       XMLRPC+email  example configuration. This uses the Bugzilla at http://my-project.org/bugzilla, logging in
       as user  bugmail@my-project.org  with  password  plugh.  It  is  used  with  a  collection  of  Mercurial
       repositories  in /var/local/hg/repos/, with a web interface at http://my-project.org/hg. Bug comments are
       sent to the Bugzilla email address bugzilla@my-project.org.

       [bugzilla]
       bzurl=http://my-project.org/bugzilla
       user=bugmail@my-project.org
       password=plugh
       version=xmlrpc+email
       bzemail=bugzilla@my-project.org
       template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}.
                {hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n
                {desc}\n
       strip=5

       [web]
       baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg

       [usermap]
       user@emaildomain.com=user.name@bugzilladomain.com

       MySQL example configuration. This has a local Bugzilla 3.2 installation in /opt/bugzilla-3.2.  The  MySQL
       database  is  on  localhost, the Bugzilla database name is bugs and MySQL is accessed with MySQL username
       bugs password XYZZY. It is used with a collection of Mercurial repositories in /var/local/hg/repos/, with
       a web interface at http://my-project.org/hg.

       [bugzilla]
       host=localhost
       password=XYZZY
       version=3.0
       bzuser=unknown@domain.com
       bzdir=/opt/bugzilla-3.2
       template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}.
                {hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n
                {desc}\n
       strip=5

       [web]
       baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg

       [usermap]
       user@emaildomain.com=user.name@bugzilladomain.com

       All the above add a comment to the Bugzilla bug record of the form:

       Changeset 3b16791d6642 in repository-name.
       http://my-project.org/hg/repository-name/rev/3b16791d6642

       Changeset commit comment. Bug 1234.

   censor
       erase file content at a given revision

       The  censor  command  instructs  Mercurial  to  erase  all  content of a file at a given revision without
       updating the changeset hash. This allows  existing  history  to  remain  valid  while  preventing  future
       clones/pulls from receiving the erased data.

       Typical uses for censor are due to security or legal requirements, including:

       * Passwords, private keys, cryptographic material
       * Licensed data/code/libraries for which the license has expired
       * Personally Identifiable Information or other private data

       Censored  nodes  can  interrupt  mercurial's  typical  operation  whenever  the  excised data needs to be
       materialized. Some commands, like hg cat/hg revert, simply fail when  asked  to  produce  censored  data.
       Others, like hg verify and hg update, must be capable of tolerating censored data to continue to function
       in a meaningful way. Such commands only tolerate censored file revisions  if  they  are  allowed  by  the
       "censor.policy=ignore" config option.

   Commands
   censor
       hg censor -r REV [-t TEXT] [FILE]

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
              censor file from specified revision

       -t,--tombstone <TEXT>
              replacement tombstone data

   children
       command to display child changesets (DEPRECATED)

       This extension is deprecated. You should use hg log -r "children(REV)" instead.

   Commands
   children
       show the children of the given or working directory revision:

       hg children [-r REV] [FILE]

       Print  the  children  of  the  working  directory's  revisions.  If a revision is given via -r/--rev, the
       children of that revision will be printed. If a file argument is given, revision in which  the  file  was
       last changed (after the working directory revision or the argument to --rev if given) is printed.

       Please use hg log instead:

       hg children => hg log -r "children(.)"
       hg children -r REV => hg log -r "children(REV)"

       See hg help log and hg help revsets.children.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
              show children of the specified revision

       --style <STYLE>
              display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template

   churn
       command to display statistics about repository history

   Commands
   churn
       histogram of changes to the repository:

       hg churn [-d DATE] [-r REV] [--aliases FILE] [FILE]

       This  command  will  display  a  histogram representing the number of changed lines or revisions, grouped
       according to the given template. The default template will group changes  by  author.   The  --dateformat
       option may be used to group the results by date instead.

       Statistics are based on the number of changed lines, or alternatively the number of matching revisions if
       the --changesets option is specified.

       Examples:

       # display count of changed lines for every committer
       hg churn -T "{author|email}"

       # display daily activity graph
       hg churn -f "%H" -s -c

       # display activity of developers by month
       hg churn -f "%Y-%m" -s -c

       # display count of lines changed in every year
       hg churn -f "%Y" -s

       It is possible to map alternate email addresses to a main address by providing a file using the following
       format:

       <alias email> = <actual email>

       Such  a  file may be specified with the --aliases option, otherwise a .hgchurn file will be looked for in
       the working directory root.  Aliases will be split from the rightmost "=".

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              count rate for the specified revision or revset

       -d,--date <DATE>
              count rate for revisions matching date spec

       -t,--oldtemplate <TEMPLATE>
              template to group changesets (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              template to group changesets (default: {author|email})

       -f,--dateformat <FORMAT>
              strftime-compatible format for grouping by date

       -c, --changesets
              count rate by number of changesets

       -s, --sort
              sort by key (default: sort by count)

       --diffstat
              display added/removed lines separately

       --aliases <FILE>
              file with email aliases

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   clonebundles
       advertise pre-generated bundles to seed clones

       "clonebundles" is a server-side extension used to advertise the existence  of  pre-generated,  externally
       hosted bundle files to clients that are cloning so that cloning can be faster, more reliable, and require
       less resources on the server.

       Cloning can be a CPU and I/O intensive operation on servers. Traditionally, the server, in response to  a
       client's  request  to  clone, dynamically generates a bundle containing the entire repository content and
       sends it to the client.  There is no caching on the server  and  the  server  will  have  to  redundantly
       generate  the same outgoing bundle in response to each clone request. For servers with large repositories
       or with high clone volume, the load from clones can make scaling the server challenging and costly.

       This extension provides server operators the ability to offload potentially expensive clone  load  to  an
       external service. Here's how it works.

       1. A server operator establishes a mechanism for making bundle files available on a hosting service where
          Mercurial clients can fetch them.

       2. A manifest file listing available bundle URLs and some optional metadata is  added  to  the  Mercurial
          repository on the server.

       3. A client initiates a clone against a clone bundles aware server.

       4. The  client  sees  the  server is advertising clone bundles and fetches the manifest listing available
          bundles.

       5. The client filters and sorts the available bundles based on what it supports and prefers.

       6. The client downloads and applies an available bundle from the server-specified URL.

       7. The client reconnects to the original server and performs the equivalent of hg  pull to  retrieve  all
          repository data not in the bundle. (The repository could have been updated between when the bundle was
          created and when the client started the clone.)

       Instead of the server generating full repository bundles for  every  clone  request,  it  generates  full
       bundles once and they are subsequently reused to bootstrap new clones. The server may still transfer data
       at clone time.  However, this is only data that has been added/changed since the bundle was created.  For
       large, established repositories, this can reduce server load for clones to less than 1% of original.

       To work, this extension requires the following of server operators:

       • Generating bundle files of repository content (typically periodically, such as once per day).

       • A  file  server  that  clients  have network access to and that Python knows how to talk to through its
         normal URL handling facility (typically an HTTP server).

       • A process for keeping the bundles manifest in sync with available bundle files.

       Strictly speaking, using a static file hosting server isn't required:  a  server  operator  could  use  a
       dynamic service for retrieving bundle data. However, static file hosting services are simple and scalable
       and should be sufficient for most needs.

       Bundle files can be generated with the hg bundle command. Typically hg bundle --all is used to produce  a
       bundle of the entire repository.

       hg debugcreatestreamclonebundle can be used to produce a special streaming clone bundle. These are bundle
       files that are extremely efficient to produce and consume (read: fast). However,  they  are  larger  than
       traditional  bundle  formats  and  require  that  clients  support the exact set of repository data store
       formats in use by the repository that created them.  Typically, a newer server can  serve  data  that  is
       compatible  with  older  clients.   However,  streaming  clone  bundles don't have this guarantee. Server
       operators need to be aware  that  newer  versions  of  Mercurial  may  produce  streaming  clone  bundles
       incompatible with older Mercurial versions.

       A  server  operator  is  responsible for creating a .hg/clonebundles.manifest file containing the list of
       available bundle files suitable for seeding clones. If this file does not exist, the repository will  not
       advertise the existence of clone bundles when clients connect.

       The manifest file contains a newline (n) delimited list of entries.

       Each line in this file defines an available bundle. Lines have the format:

          <URL> [<key>=<value>[ <key>=<value>]]

       That  is,  a  URL  followed by an optional, space-delimited list of key=value pairs describing additional
       properties of this bundle. Both keys and values are URI encoded.

       Keys in UPPERCASE are reserved for use by Mercurial and are defined below.  All non-uppercase keys can be
       used  by  site  installations. An example use for custom properties is to use the datacenter attribute to
       define which data center a file is hosted in. Clients could then prefer  a  server  in  the  data  center
       closest to them.

       The following reserved keys are currently defined:

       BUNDLESPEC
              A "bundle specification" string that describes the type of the bundle.

              These are string values that are accepted by the "--type" argument of hg bundle.

              The values are parsed in strict mode, which means they must be of the "<compression>-<type>" form.
              See mercurial.exchange.parsebundlespec() for more details.

              hg debugbundle --spec can be used to print the bundle specification string for a bundle file.  The
              output of this command can be used verbatim for the value of BUNDLESPEC (it is already escaped).

              Clients will automatically filter out specifications that are unknown or unsupported so they won't
              attempt to download something that likely won't apply.

              The actual value doesn't impact client behavior beyond filtering: clients  will  still  sniff  the
              bundle type from the header of downloaded files.

              Use of this key is highly recommended, as it allows clients to easily skip unsupported bundles. If
              this key is not defined, an old client may attempt to apply a  bundle  that  it  is  incapable  of
              reading.

       REQUIRESNI
              Whether Server Name Indication (SNI) is required to connect to the URL.  SNI allows servers to use
              multiple certificates on the same IP. It is somewhat common in CDNs and other  hosting  providers.
              Older  Python  versions  do  not  support  SNI. Defining this attribute enables clients with older
              Python versions to filter this entry without experiencing an  opaque  SSL  failure  at  connection
              time.

              If  this  is  defined,  it is important to advertise a non-SNI fallback URL or clients running old
              Python releases may not be able to clone with the clonebundles facility.

              Value should be "true".

       Manifests can contain multiple entries. Assuming metadata is defined, clients will  filter  entries  from
       the  manifest  that they don't support. The remaining entries are optionally sorted by client preferences
       (ui.clonebundleprefers config option). The client then attempts to fetch the bundle at the first  URL  in
       the remaining list.

       Errors  when downloading a bundle will fail the entire clone operation: clients do not automatically fall
       back to a traditional clone. The reason for this is that if a  server  is  using  clone  bundles,  it  is
       probably  doing  so  because  the  feature  is  necessary  to  help it scale. In other words, there is an
       assumption that clone load will be offloaded to another service  and  that  the  Mercurial  server  isn't
       responsible for serving this clone load.  If that other service experiences issues and clients start mass
       falling back to the original Mercurial server, the added clone load could overwhelm  the  server  due  to
       unexpected  load  and  effectively take it offline. Not having clients automatically fall back to cloning
       from the original server mitigates this scenario.

       Because there is no automatic Mercurial server fallback on failure of the bundle hosting service,  it  is
       important for server operators to view the bundle hosting service as an extension of the Mercurial server
       in terms of availability and service level agreements: if the bundle hosting service goes down,  so  does
       the ability for clients to clone. Note: clients will see a message informing them how to bypass the clone
       bundles facility when a failure occurs. So server operators should prepare  for  some  people  to  follow
       these  instructions  when  a failure occurs, thus driving more load to the original Mercurial server when
       the bundle hosting service fails.

   commitextras
       adds a new flag extras to commit (ADVANCED)

   convert
       import revisions from foreign VCS repositories into Mercurial

   Commands
   convert
       convert a foreign SCM repository to a Mercurial one.:

       hg convert [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST [REVMAP]]

       Accepted source formats [identifiers]:

       • Mercurial [hg]

       • CVS [cvs]

       • Darcs [darcs]

       • git [git]

       • Subversion [svn]

       • Monotone [mtn]

       • GNU Arch [gnuarch]

       • Bazaar [bzr]

       • Perforce [p4]

       Accepted destination formats [identifiers]:

       • Mercurial [hg]

       • Subversion [svn] (history on branches is not preserved)

       If no revision is given, all revisions will be converted.  Otherwise, convert will only import up to  the
       named revision (given in a format understood by the source).

       If  no  destination  directory  name  is  specified,  it  defaults to the basename of the source with -hg
       appended. If the destination repository doesn't exist, it will be created.

       By default, all sources except Mercurial will use --branchsort.  Mercurial uses --sourcesort to  preserve
       original revision numbers order. Sort modes have the following effects:

       --branchsort
              convert  from  parent  to child revision when possible, which means branches are usually converted
              one after the other. It generates more compact repositories.

       --datesort
              sort revisions by date. Converted repositories have good-looking changelogs but are often an order
              of magnitude larger than the same ones generated by --branchsort.

       --sourcesort
              try to preserve source revisions order, only supported by Mercurial sources.

       --closesort
              try  to move closed revisions as close as possible to parent branches, only supported by Mercurial
              sources.

       If REVMAP isn't given, it will be put in a default location (<dest>/.hg/shamap by default). The REVMAP is
       a simple text file that maps each source commit ID to the destination ID for that revision, like so:

       <source ID> <destination ID>

       If  the file doesn't exist, it's automatically created. It's updated on each commit copied, so hg convert
       can be interrupted and can be run repeatedly to copy new commits.

       The authormap is a simple text file that maps each source commit author to a destination  commit  author.
       It  is  handy  for  source SCMs that use unix logins to identify authors (e.g.: CVS). One line per author
       mapping and the line format is:

       source author = destination author

       Empty lines and lines starting with a # are ignored.

       The filemap is a file that allows filtering and remapping of files and directories. Each line can contain
       one of the following directives:

       include path/to/file-or-dir

       exclude path/to/file-or-dir

       rename path/to/source path/to/destination

       Comment lines start with #. A specified path matches if it equals the full relative name of a file or one
       of its parent directories. The include or exclude directive with the longest matching  path  applies,  so
       line order does not matter.

       The  include  directive  causes a file, or all files under a directory, to be included in the destination
       repository. The default if there are no include statements is to include everything.  If  there  are  any
       include  statements,  nothing  else is included.  The exclude directive causes files or directories to be
       omitted. The rename directive renames a  file  or  directory  if  it  is  converted.  To  rename  from  a
       subdirectory into the root of the repository, use . as the path to rename to.

       --full will make sure the converted changesets contain exactly the right files with the right content. It
       will make a full conversion of all files, not just the ones that have changed.  Files  that  already  are
       correct  will  not  be  changed. This can be used to apply filemap changes when converting incrementally.
       This is currently only supported for Mercurial and Subversion.

       The splicemap is a file that allows insertion of synthetic history, letting you specify the parents of  a
       revision.  This  is  useful  if  you  want  to  e.g.  give  a  Subversion merge two parents, or graft two
       disconnected series of history together. Each entry contains a key, followed by a space, followed by  one
       or two comma-separated values:

       key parent1, parent2

       The  key  is the revision ID in the source revision control system whose parents should be modified (same
       format as a key in .hg/shamap). The values are the revision IDs (in  either  the  source  or  destination
       revision  control  system) that should be used as the new parents for that node. For example, if you have
       merged "release-1.0" into "trunk", then you should specify the revision on "trunk" as  the  first  parent
       and the one on the "release-1.0" branch as the second.

       The  branchmap  is  a  file  that allows you to rename a branch when it is being brought in from whatever
       external repository. When used in conjunction with a splicemap, it allows for a powerful  combination  to
       help  fix  even  the  most  badly  mismanaged repositories and turn them into nicely structured Mercurial
       repositories. The branchmap contains lines of the form:

       original_branch_name new_branch_name

       where "original_branch_name" is the name of the branch in the source repository, and "new_branch_name" is
       the  name  of  the branch is the destination repository. No whitespace is allowed in the new branch name.
       This can be used to (for instance) move code in one repository from "default" to a named branch.

   Mercurial Source
       The Mercurial source recognizes the following configuration options, which you can  set  on  the  command
       line with --config:

       convert.hg.ignoreerrors
              ignore  integrity errors when reading.  Use it to fix Mercurial repositories with missing revlogs,
              by converting from and to Mercurial. Default is False.

       convert.hg.saverev
              store original revision ID in changeset (forces target IDs to change). It takes a boolean argument
              and defaults to False.

       convert.hg.startrev
              specify the initial Mercurial revision.  The default is 0.

       convert.hg.revs
              revset specifying the source revisions to convert.

   CVS Source
       CVS  source  will use a sandbox (i.e. a checked-out copy) from CVS to indicate the starting point of what
       will be converted. Direct access to the repository files is not needed, unless of course  the  repository
       is  :local:.  The  conversion uses the top level directory in the sandbox to find the CVS repository, and
       then uses CVS rlog commands to find files to convert. This means that unless  a  filemap  is  given,  all
       files  under  the  starting directory will be converted, and that any directory reorganization in the CVS
       sandbox is ignored.

       The following options can be used with --config:

       convert.cvsps.cache
              Set to False to disable remote log caching, for testing and debugging purposes. Default is True.

       convert.cvsps.fuzz
              Specify the maximum time (in seconds) that is allowed between commits with identical user and  log
              message  in  a single changeset. When very large files were checked in as part of a changeset then
              the default may not be long enough.  The default is 60.

       convert.cvsps.logencoding
              Specify encoding name to be used for transcoding CVS log messages. Multiple encoding names can  be
              specified  as  a  list  (see hg help config.Syntax), but only the first acceptable encoding in the
              list is used per CVS log entries. This transcoding is executed before cvslog hook below.

       convert.cvsps.mergeto
              Specify a regular expression to which commit log messages are matched. If a match occurs, then the
              conversion  process  will  insert  a  dummy  revision merging the branch on which this log message
              occurs to the branch indicated in the regex. Default is {{mergetobranch ([-\w]+)}}

       convert.cvsps.mergefrom
              Specify a regular expression to which commit log messages are matched. If a match occurs, then the
              conversion  process  will add the most recent revision on the branch indicated in the regex as the
              second parent of the changeset. Default is {{mergefrombranch ([-\w]+)}}

       convert.localtimezone
              use local time (as determined by the  TZ  environment  variable)  for  changeset  date/times.  The
              default is False (use UTC).

       hooks.cvslog
              Specify a Python function to be called at the end of gathering the CVS log. The function is passed
              a list with the log entries, and can modify the entries in-place, or add or delete them.

       hooks.cvschangesets
              Specify a Python function to be called after the changesets are calculated from the CVS  log.  The
              function  is  passed a list with the changeset entries, and can modify the changesets in-place, or
              add or delete them.

       An additional "debugcvsps" Mercurial command allows the builtin changeset merging code to be run  without
       doing  a  conversion.  Its parameters and output are similar to that of cvsps 2.1. Please see the command
       help for more details.

   Subversion Source
       Subversion  source  detects  classical   trunk/branches/tags   layouts.    By   default,   the   supplied
       svn://repo/path/  source URL is converted as a single branch. If svn://repo/path/trunk exists it replaces
       the default branch. If  svn://repo/path/branches  exists,  its  subdirectories  are  listed  as  possible
       branches.  If  svn://repo/path/tags exists, it is looked for tags referencing converted branches. Default
       trunk, branches and tags values can be overridden with following options. Set them to paths  relative  to
       the source URL, or leave them blank to disable auto detection.

       The following options can be set with --config:

       convert.svn.branches
              specify the directory containing branches.  The default is branches.

       convert.svn.tags
              specify the directory containing tags. The default is tags.

       convert.svn.trunk
              specify the name of the trunk branch. The default is trunk.

       convert.localtimezone
              use  local  time  (as  determined  by  the  TZ environment variable) for changeset date/times. The
              default is False (use UTC).

       Source history can be retrieved starting at a specific revision, instead of being  integrally  converted.
       Only single branch conversions are supported.

       convert.svn.startrev
              specify start Subversion revision number.  The default is 0.

   Git Source
       The  Git  importer converts commits from all reachable branches (refs in refs/heads) and remotes (refs in
       refs/remotes) to Mercurial.  Branches are converted to bookmarks with the same  name,  with  the  leading
       'refs/heads' stripped. Git submodules are converted to Git subrepos in Mercurial.

       The following options can be set with --config:

       convert.git.similarity
              specify  how  similar files modified in a commit must be to be imported as renames or copies, as a
              percentage between 0 (disabled) and 100 (files must be identical). For example, 90  means  that  a
              delete/add  pair  will  be  imported  as a rename if more than 90% of the file hasn't changed. The
              default is 50.

       convert.git.findcopiesharder
              while detecting copies, look at all files in the working copy instead of just changed  ones.  This
              is very expensive for large projects, and is only effective when convert.git.similarity is greater
              than 0. The default is False.

       convert.git.renamelimit
              perform rename and copy detection up to this many changed files in a commit. Increasing this  will
              make rename and copy detection more accurate but will significantly slow down computation on large
              projects. The option is only relevant if convert.git.similarity is greater than 0. The default  is
              400.

       convert.git.committeractions
              list of actions to take when processing author and committer values.

              Git  commits  have  separate  author (who wrote the commit) and committer (who applied the commit)
              fields. Not all destinations support separate author and committer fields  (including  Mercurial).
              This config option controls what to do with these author and committer fields during conversion.

              A  value  of  messagedifferent will append a committer: ...  line to the commit message if the Git
              committer is different from the author. The prefix of that line can be specified using the  syntax
              messagedifferent=<prefix>.  e.g.  messagedifferent=git-committer:.   When a prefix is specified, a
              space will always be inserted between the prefix and the value.

              messagealways behaves like messagedifferent except it will always result in a committer: ...  line
              being appended to the commit message. This value is mutually exclusive with messagedifferent.

              dropcommitter  will remove references to the committer. Only references to the author will remain.
              Actions that add references to the committer will have no effect when this is set.

              replaceauthor will replace the value of the author field with the committer.  Other  actions  that
              add references to the committer will still take effect when this is set.

              The default is messagedifferent.

       convert.git.extrakeys
              list  of  extra  keys from commit metadata to copy to the destination. Some Git repositories store
              extra metadata in commits.  By default, this non-default metadata will be lost during  conversion.
              Setting  this config option can retain that metadata. Some built-in keys such as parent and branch
              are not allowed to be copied.

       convert.git.remoteprefix
              remote refs are converted as bookmarks with convert.git.remoteprefix as a prefix followed by a  /.
              The default is 'remote'.

       convert.git.saverev
              whether to store the original Git commit ID in the metadata of the destination commit. The default
              is True.

       convert.git.skipsubmodules
              does not convert root level .gitmodules files or files with 160000 mode  indicating  a  submodule.
              Default is False.

   Perforce Source
       The  Perforce  (P4)  importer  can  be given a p4 depot path or a client specification as source. It will
       convert all files  in  the  source  to  a  flat  Mercurial  repository,  ignoring  labels,  branches  and
       integrations.  Note  that  when a depot path is given you then usually should specify a target directory,
       because otherwise the target may be named ...-hg.

       The following options can be set with --config:

       convert.p4.encoding
              specify the encoding to use when decoding standard output of the Perforce command line  tool.  The
              default is default system encoding.

       convert.p4.startrev
              specify initial Perforce revision (a Perforce changelist number).

   Mercurial Destination
       The  Mercurial  destination  will  recognize  Mercurial subrepositories in the destination directory, and
       update  the  .hgsubstate  file   automatically   if   the   destination   subrepositories   contain   the
       <dest>/<sub>/.hg/shamap  file.  Converting a repository with subrepositories requires converting a single
       repository at a time, from the bottom up.

       An example showing how to convert a repository with subrepositories:

       # so convert knows the type when it sees a non empty destination
       $ hg init converted

       $ hg convert orig/sub1 converted/sub1
       $ hg convert orig/sub2 converted/sub2
       $ hg convert orig converted

       The following options are supported:

       convert.hg.clonebranches
              dispatch source branches in separate clones. The default is False.

       convert.hg.tagsbranch
              branch name for tag revisions, defaults to default.

       convert.hg.usebranchnames
              preserve branch names. The default is True.

       convert.hg.sourcename
              records the given string as a 'convert_source' extra value on  each  commit  made  in  the  target
              repository. The default is None.

   All Destinations
       All destination types accept the following options:

       convert.skiptags
              does not convert tags from the source repo to the target repo. The default is False.

       Options:

       --authors <FILE>
              username mapping filename (DEPRECATED) (use --authormap instead)

       -s,--source-type <TYPE>
              source repository type

       -d,--dest-type <TYPE>
              destination repository type

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              import up to source revision REV

       -A,--authormap <FILE>
              remap usernames using this file

       --filemap <FILE>
              remap file names using contents of file

       --full apply filemap changes by converting all files again

       --splicemap <FILE>
              splice synthesized history into place

       --branchmap <FILE>
              change branch names while converting

       --branchsort
              try to sort changesets by branches

       --datesort
              try to sort changesets by date

       --sourcesort
              preserve source changesets order

       --closesort
              try to reorder closed revisions

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   eol
       automatically manage newlines in repository files

       This extension allows you to manage the type of line endings (CRLF or LF) that are used in the repository
       and in the local working directory. That way you can get CRLF line endings on Windows and LF on Unix/Mac,
       thereby letting everybody use their OS native line endings.

       The extension reads its configuration from a versioned .hgeol configuration file found in the root of the
       working directory. The .hgeol file use the same syntax as all other  Mercurial  configuration  files.  It
       uses two sections, [patterns] and [repository].

       The  [patterns]  section specifies how line endings should be converted between the working directory and
       the repository. The format is specified by a file pattern. The first match is used, so put more  specific
       patterns first. The available line endings are LF, CRLF, and BIN.

       Files  with the declared format of CRLF or LF are always checked out and stored in the repository in that
       format and files declared to be binary (BIN) are left unchanged. Additionally, native  is  an  alias  for
       checking  out in the platform's default line ending: LF on Unix (including Mac OS X) and CRLF on Windows.
       Note that BIN (do nothing to line endings) is Mercurial's default behavior; it is only needed if you need
       to override a later, more general pattern.

       The  optional  [repository] section specifies the line endings to use for files stored in the repository.
       It has a single setting, native, which determines the storage line endings for files declared  as  native
       in  the  [patterns] section. It can be set to LF or CRLF. The default is LF. For example, this means that
       on Windows, files configured as native (CRLF by default) will be converted  to  LF  when  stored  in  the
       repository.  Files  declared as LF, CRLF, or BIN in the [patterns] section are always stored as-is in the
       repository.

       Example versioned .hgeol file:

       [patterns]
       **.py = native
       **.vcproj = CRLF
       **.txt = native
       Makefile = LF
       **.jpg = BIN

       [repository]
       native = LF

       Note   The rules will first apply when files are touched in the working directory, e.g.  by  updating  to
              null and back to tip to touch all files.

       The  extension uses an optional [eol] section read from both the normal Mercurial configuration files and
       the .hgeol file, with the latter overriding the former. You can use that section to control  the  overall
       behavior. There are three settings:

       • eol.native  (default  os.linesep)  can  be  set to LF or CRLF to override the default interpretation of
         native for checkout. This can be used with hg archive on Unix, say, to generate an archive where  files
         have line endings for Windows.

       • eol.only-consistent  (default  True)  can  be  set  to  False  to make the extension convert files with
         inconsistent EOLs. Inconsistent means that there is both CRLF and LF present in the file.   Such  files
         are normally not touched under the assumption that they have mixed EOLs on purpose.

       • eol.fix-trailing-newline  (default  False) can be set to True to ensure that converted files end with a
         EOL character (either \n or \r\n as per the configured patterns).

       The extension provides cleverencode: and cleverdecode: filters like the  deprecated  win32text  extension
       does. This means that you can disable win32text and enable eol and your filters will still work. You only
       need to these filters until you have prepared a .hgeol file.

       The win32text.forbid* hooks provided by the win32text extension have been  unified  into  a  single  hook
       named  eol.checkheadshook.  The  hook  will  lookup the expected line endings from the .hgeol file, which
       means you must migrate to a .hgeol file first before  using  the  hook.  eol.checkheadshook  only  checks
       heads, intermediate invalid revisions will be pushed. To forbid them completely, use the eol.checkallhook
       hook. These hooks are best used as pretxnchangegroup hooks.

       See hg help patterns for more information about the glob patterns used.

   extdiff
       command to allow external programs to compare revisions

       The extdiff Mercurial extension allows you to use external programs to  compare  revisions,  or  revision
       with  working directory. The external diff programs are called with a configurable set of options and two
       non-option arguments: paths to directories containing snapshots of files to compare.

       The extdiff extension also allows you to configure new diff commands, so you  do  not  need  to  type  hg
       extdiff -p kdiff3 always.

       [extdiff]
       # add new command that runs GNU diff(1) in 'context diff' mode
       cdiff = gdiff -Nprc5
       ## or the old way:
       #cmd.cdiff = gdiff
       #opts.cdiff = -Nprc5

       # add new command called meld, runs meld (no need to name twice).  If
       # the meld executable is not available, the meld tool in [merge-tools]
       # will be used, if available
       meld =

       # add new command called vimdiff, runs gvimdiff with DirDiff plugin
       # (see http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=102) Non
       # English user, be sure to put "let g:DirDiffDynamicDiffText = 1" in
       # your .vimrc
       vimdiff = gvim -f "+next" \
                 "+execute 'DirDiff' fnameescape(argv(0)) fnameescape(argv(1))"

       Tool arguments can include variables that are expanded at runtime:

       $parent1, $plabel1 - filename, descriptive label of first parent
       $child,   $clabel  - filename, descriptive label of child revision
       $parent2, $plabel2 - filename, descriptive label of second parent
       $root              - repository root
       $parent is an alias for $parent1.

       The  extdiff extension will look in your [diff-tools] and [merge-tools] sections for diff tool arguments,
       when none are specified in [extdiff].

       [extdiff]
       kdiff3 =

       [diff-tools]
       kdiff3.diffargs=--L1 '$plabel1' --L2 '$clabel' $parent $child

       You can use -I/-X and list of file or directory names like normal hg diff command. The extdiff  extension
       makes  snapshots  of only needed files, so running the external diff program will actually be pretty fast
       (at least faster than having to compare the entire tree).

   Commands
   extdiff
       use external program to diff repository (or selected files):

       hg extdiff [OPT]... [FILE]...

       Show differences between revisions for the specified  files,  using  an  external  program.  The  default
       program used is diff, with default options "-Npru".

       To  select  a different program, use the -p/--program option. The program will be passed the names of two
       directories to compare. To pass additional options to the program, use -o/--option. These will be  passed
       before the names of the directories to compare.

       When  two  revision  arguments  are  given,  then  changes are shown between those revisions. If only one
       revision is specified then that revision is compared to the working directory, and, when no revisions are
       specified, the working directory files are compared to its parent.

       Options:

       -p,--program <CMD>
              comparison program to run

       -o,--option <OPT[+]>
              pass option to comparison program

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              revision

       -c,--change <REV>
              change made by revision

       --patch
              compare patches for two revisions

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   factotum
       http authentication with factotum

       This  extension  allows  the  factotum(4)  facility  on  Plan  9  from  Bell  Labs  platforms  to provide
       authentication information for HTTP access. Configuration entries specified in the auth section  as  well
       as  authentication  information  provided  in  the  repository  URL  are fully supported. If no prefix is
       specified, a value of "*" will be assumed.

       By default, keys are specified as:

       proto=pass service=hg prefix=<prefix> user=<username> !password=<password>

       If the factotum extension is unable to read the required key, one will be requested interactively.

       A configuration section is available to customize runtime behavior. By default, these entries are:

       [factotum]
       executable = /bin/auth/factotum
       mountpoint = /mnt/factotum
       service = hg

       The executable entry defines the full path to the factotum binary. The mountpoint entry defines the  path
       to the factotum file service. Lastly, the service entry controls the service name used when reading keys.

   fetch
       pull, update and merge in one command (DEPRECATED)

   Commands
   fetch
       pull changes from a remote repository, merge new changes if needed.:

       hg fetch [SOURCE]

       This  finds  all  changes  from  the  repository  at the specified path or URL and adds them to the local
       repository.

       If the pulled changes add a new branch head, the head is automatically merged,  and  the  result  of  the
       merge is committed.  Otherwise, the working directory is updated to include the new changes.

       When a merge is needed, the working directory is first updated to the newly pulled changes. Local changes
       are then merged into the pulled changes. To switch the merge order, use --switch-parent.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              a specific revision you would like to pull

       --edit invoke editor on commit messages

       --force-editor
              edit commit message (DEPRECATED)

       --switch-parent
              switch parents when merging

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
              read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
              record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
              record the specified user as committer

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
              specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
              specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
              do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   fsmonitor
       Faster status operations with the Watchman file monitor (EXPERIMENTAL)

       Integrates the file-watching program Watchman with Mercurial to produce faster status results.

       On a particular Linux system, for a real-world repository with over 400,000 files hosted on ext4, vanilla
       hg status takes 1.3 seconds. On the same system, with fsmonitor it takes about 0.3 seconds.

       fsmonitor  requires  no configuration -- it will tell Watchman about your repository as necessary. You'll
       need to install Watchman from https://facebook.github.io/watchman/ and make sure it is in your PATH.

       fsmonitor is incompatible with the largefiles and eol extensions, and will disable itself if any of those
       are active.

       The following configuration options exist:

       [fsmonitor]
       mode = {off, on, paranoid}

       When mode = off, fsmonitor will disable itself (similar to not loading the extension at all). When mode =
       on, fsmonitor will be enabled (the default).  When mode = paranoid, fsmonitor will  query  both  Watchman
       and the filesystem, and ensure that the results are consistent.

       [fsmonitor]
       timeout = (float)

       A  value,  in  seconds,  that  determines  how  long  fsmonitor will wait for Watchman to return results.
       Defaults to 2.0.

       [fsmonitor]
       blacklistusers = (list of userids)

       A list of usernames for which fsmonitor will disable itself altogether.

       [fsmonitor]
       walk_on_invalidate = (boolean)

       Whether or not to walk the whole repo ourselves when our cached state has been invalidated,  for  example
       when  Watchman has been restarted or .hgignore rules have been changed. Walking the repo in that case can
       result in competing for I/O with Watchman. For large repos it is recommended to set this value to  false.
       You  may wish to set this to true if you have a very fast filesystem that can outpace the IPC overhead of
       getting the result data for the full repo from Watchman. Defaults to false.

       [fsmonitor]
       warn_when_unused = (boolean)

       Whether to print a warning during certain operations when fsmonitor would be  beneficial  to  performance
       but isn't enabled.

       [fsmonitor]
       warn_update_file_count = (integer)

       If  warn_when_unused  is  set  and  fsmonitor  isn't  enabled,  a  warning will be printed during working
       directory updates if this many files will be created.

   githelp
       try mapping git commands to Mercurial commands

       Tries to map a given git command to a Mercurial command:

          $ hg githelp -- git checkout master hg update master

       If an unknown command or parameter combination is detected, an error is produced.

   Commands
   githelp
       suggests the Mercurial equivalent of the given git command:

       hg githelp

       Usage: hg githelp -- <git command>

          aliases: git

   gpg
       commands to sign and verify changesets

   Commands
   sigcheck
       verify all the signatures there may be for a particular revision:

       hg sigcheck REV

       verify all the signatures there may be for a particular revision

   sign
       add a signature for the current or given revision:

       hg sign [OPTION]... [REV]...

       If no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used, or tip if no  revision  is  checked
       out.

       The gpg.cmd config setting can be used to specify the command to run. A default key can be specified with
       gpg.key.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       Options:

       -l, --local
              make the signature local

       -f, --force
              sign even if the sigfile is modified

       --no-commit
              do not commit the sigfile after signing

       -k,--key <ID>
              the key id to sign with

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -d,--date <DATE>
              record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
              record the specified user as committer

   sigs
       list signed changesets:

       hg sigs

       list signed changesets

   graphlog
       command to view revision graphs from a shell (DEPRECATED)

       The functionality of this extension has been include in core Mercurial since version 2.3. Please  use  hg
       log -G ... instead.

       This  extension  adds  a  --graph option to the incoming, outgoing and log commands. When this options is
       given, an ASCII representation of the revision graph is also shown.

   Commands
   glog
       show revision history alongside an ASCII revision graph:

       hg glog [OPTION]... [FILE]

       Print a revision history alongside a revision graph drawn with ASCII characters.

       Nodes printed as an @ character are parents of the working directory.

       This is an alias to hg log -G.

       Options:

       -f, --follow
              follow changeset history, or file history across copies and renames

       --follow-first
              only follow the first parent of merge changesets (DEPRECATED)

       -d,--date <DATE>
              show revisions matching date spec

       -C, --copies
              show copied files

       -k,--keyword <TEXT[+]>
              do case-insensitive search for a given text

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              show the specified revision or revset

       --removed
              include revisions where files were removed

       -m, --only-merges
              show only merges (DEPRECATED)

       -u,--user <USER[+]>
              revisions committed by user

       --only-branch <BRANCH[+]>
              show only changesets within the given named branch (DEPRECATED)

       -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]>
              show changesets within the given named branch

       -P,--prune <REV[+]>
              do not display revision or any of its ancestors

       -p, --patch
              show patch

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       -l,--limit <NUM>
              limit number of changes displayed

       -M, --no-merges
              do not show merges

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       -G, --graph
              show the revision DAG

       --style <STYLE>
              display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   hgk
       browse the repository in a graphical way

       The hgk extension allows browsing the history of a repository in a  graphical  way.  It  requires  Tcl/Tk
       version 8.4 or later. (Tcl/Tk is not distributed with Mercurial.)

       hgk  consists  of  two  parts:  a Tcl script that does the displaying and querying of information, and an
       extension to Mercurial named hgk.py, which provides hooks for hgk to get information. hgk can be found in
       the contrib directory, and the extension is shipped in the hgext repository, and needs to be enabled.

       The  hg view command will launch the hgk Tcl script. For this command to work, hgk must be in your search
       path. Alternately, you can specify the path to hgk in your configuration file:

       [hgk]
       path = /location/of/hgk

       hgk can make use of the extdiff extension to visualize revisions.  Assuming you  had  already  configured
       extdiff vdiff command, just add:

       [hgk]
       vdiff=vdiff

       Revisions  context  menu  will  now  display  additional  entries  to  fire vdiff on hovered and selected
       revisions.

   Commands
   view
       start interactive history viewer:

       hg view [-l LIMIT] [REVRANGE]

       start interactive history viewer

       Options:

       -l,--limit <NUM>
              limit number of changes displayed

   highlight
       syntax highlighting for hgweb (requires Pygments)

       It depends on the Pygments syntax highlighting library: http://pygments.org/

       There are the following configuration options:

       [web]
       pygments_style = <style> (default: colorful)
       highlightfiles = <fileset> (default: size('<5M'))
       highlightonlymatchfilename = <bool> (default False)

       highlightonlymatchfilename will only highlight files if their type could be identified by their filename.
       When  this  is  not  enabled  (the  default),  Pygments will try very hard to identify the file type from
       content and any match (even matches with a low confidence score) will be used.

   histedit
       interactive history editing

       With this extension installed, Mercurial gains one new command: histedit. Usage is as  follows,  assuming
       the following history:

       @  3[tip]   7c2fd3b9020c   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add delta
       |
       o  2   030b686bedc4   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add gamma
       |
       o  1   c561b4e977df   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add beta
       |
       o  0   d8d2fcd0e319   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
            Add alpha

       If you were to run hg histedit c561b4e977df, you would see the following file open in your editor:

       pick c561b4e977df Add beta
       pick 030b686bedc4 Add gamma
       pick 7c2fd3b9020c Add delta

       # Edit history between c561b4e977df and 7c2fd3b9020c
       #
       # Commits are listed from least to most recent
       #
       # Commands:
       #  p, pick = use commit
       #  e, edit = use commit, but stop for amending
       #  f, fold = use commit, but combine it with the one above
       #  r, roll = like fold, but discard this commit's description and date
       #  d, drop = remove commit from history
       #  m, mess = edit commit message without changing commit content
       #  b, base = checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there
       #

       In  this  file,  lines  beginning  with  # are ignored. You must specify a rule for each revision in your
       history. For example, if you had meant to add gamma before beta, and then wanted to add delta in the same
       revision as beta, you would reorganize the file to look like this:

       pick 030b686bedc4 Add gamma
       pick c561b4e977df Add beta
       fold 7c2fd3b9020c Add delta

       # Edit history between c561b4e977df and 7c2fd3b9020c
       #
       # Commits are listed from least to most recent
       #
       # Commands:
       #  p, pick = use commit
       #  e, edit = use commit, but stop for amending
       #  f, fold = use commit, but combine it with the one above
       #  r, roll = like fold, but discard this commit's description and date
       #  d, drop = remove commit from history
       #  m, mess = edit commit message without changing commit content
       #  b, base = checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there
       #

       At  which  point  you  close  the  editor and histedit starts working. When you specify a fold operation,
       histedit will open an editor when it folds those revisions together, offering you a chance  to  clean  up
       the commit message:

       Add beta
       ***
       Add delta

       Edit  the  commit message to your liking, then close the editor. The date used for the commit will be the
       later of the two commits' dates. For this example, let's assume that the commit message  was  changed  to
       Add  beta and delta.  After histedit has run and had a chance to remove any old or temporary revisions it
       needed, the history looks like this:

       @  2[tip]   989b4d060121   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add beta and delta.
       |
       o  1   081603921c3f   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add gamma
       |
       o  0   d8d2fcd0e319   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
            Add alpha

       Note that histedit does not remove any revisions (even  its  own  temporary  ones)  until  after  it  has
       completed  all  the  editing  operations,  so it will probably perform several strip operations when it's
       done. For the above example, it had to run strip twice. Strip can be  slow  depending  on  a  variety  of
       factors,  so  you  might  need  to  be a little patient. You can choose to keep the original revisions by
       passing the --keep flag.

       The edit operation will drop you back to a command prompt, allowing you to edit files freely, or even use
       hg  record  to  commit  some  changes  as  a separate commit. When you're done, any remaining uncommitted
       changes will be committed as well. When done, run hg histedit --continue to finish this  step.  If  there
       are uncommitted changes, you'll be prompted for a new commit message, but the default commit message will
       be the original message for the edit ed revision, and the date of the original commit will be preserved.

       The message operation will give you a chance to revise a commit message without  changing  the  contents.
       It's a shortcut for doing edit immediately followed by hg histedit --continue`.

       If  histedit  encounters a conflict when moving a revision (while handling pick or fold), it'll stop in a
       similar manner to edit with the difference that it won't prompt you for a commit message  when  done.  If
       you  decide  at this point that you don't like how much work it will be to rearrange history, or that you
       made a mistake, you can use hg histedit --abort to abandon the new changes you have made  and  return  to
       the state before you attempted to edit your history.

       If  we  clone  the  histedit-ed example repository above and add four more changes, such that we have the
       following history:

       @  6[tip]   038383181893   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   stefan
       |    Add theta
       |
       o  5   140988835471   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   stefan
       |    Add eta
       |
       o  4   122930637314   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   stefan
       |    Add zeta
       |
       o  3   836302820282   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   stefan
       |    Add epsilon
       |
       o  2   989b4d060121   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add beta and delta.
       |
       o  1   081603921c3f   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
       |    Add gamma
       |
       o  0   d8d2fcd0e319   2009-04-27 18:04 -0500   durin42
            Add alpha

       If you run hg histedit --outgoing on the clone then it is the same as running hg  histedit  836302820282.
       If you need plan to push to a repository that Mercurial does not detect to be related to the source repo,
       you can add a --force option.

   Config
       Histedit rule lines are truncated to 80 characters by default. You can customize this behavior by setting
       a different length in your configuration file:

       [histedit]
       linelen = 120      # truncate rule lines at 120 characters

       hg  histedit  attempts  to automatically choose an appropriate base revision to use. To change which base
       revision is used, define a revset in your configuration file:

       [histedit]
       defaultrev = only(.) & draft()

       By default each edited revision needs to be present in histedit commands.  To remove revision you need to
       use drop operation. You can configure the drop to be implicit for missing commits by adding:

       [histedit]
       dropmissing = True

       By  default,  histedit  will  close  the transaction after each action. For performance purposes, you can
       configure histedit to use a  single  transaction  across  the  entire  histedit.  WARNING:  This  setting
       introduces  a  significant  risk  of  losing  the  work  you've done in a histedit if the histedit aborts
       unexpectedly:

       [histedit]
       singletransaction = True

   Commands
   histedit
       interactively edit changeset history:

       hg histedit [OPTIONS] ([ANCESTOR] | --outgoing [URL])

       This command lets you edit a linear series of changesets (up to  and  including  the  working  directory,
       which should be clean).  You can:

       • pick to [re]order a changeset

       • drop to omit changeset

       • mess to reword the changeset commit message

       • fold to combine it with the preceding changeset (using the later date)

       • roll like fold, but discarding this commit's description and date

       • edit to edit this changeset (preserving date)

       • base to checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there

       There are a number of ways to select the root changeset:

       • Specify ANCESTOR directly

       • Use  --outgoing  --  it  will  be  the first linear changeset not included in destination. (See hg help
         config.paths.default-push)

       • Otherwise, the value from the "histedit.defaultrev" config option is used as a  revset  to  select  the
         base  revision  when  ANCESTOR  is not specified. The first revision returned by the revset is used. By
         default, this selects the editable history that is unique to the ancestry of the working directory.

       If you use --outgoing, this command will abort if there are ambiguous outgoing revisions. For example, if
       there are multiple branches containing outgoing revisions.

       Use  "min(outgoing()  and  ::.)"  or  similar  revset specification instead of --outgoing to specify edit
       target revision exactly in such ambiguous situation. See  hg  help  revsets for  detail  about  selecting
       revisions.

       Examples:

          • A number of changes have been made.  Revision 3 is no longer needed.

            Start history editing from revision 3:

            hg histedit -r 3

            An editor opens, containing the list of revisions, with specific actions specified:

            pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
            pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
            pick 0a9639fcda9d 5 Morgify the cromulancy

            Additional information about the possible actions to take appears below the list of revisions.

            To remove revision 3 from the history, its action (at the beginning of the relevant line) is changed
            to 'drop':

            drop 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
            pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
            pick 0a9639fcda9d 5 Morgify the cromulancy

          • A number of changes have been made.  Revision 2 and 4 need to be swapped.

            Start history editing from revision 2:

            hg histedit -r 2

            An editor opens, containing the list of revisions, with specific actions specified:

            pick 252a1af424ad 2 Blorb a morgwazzle
            pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
            pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog

            To swap revision 2 and 4, its lines are swapped in the editor:

            pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog
            pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar
            pick 252a1af424ad 2 Blorb a morgwazzle

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if user intervention is required (not only for intentional  "edit"  command,  but
       also for resolving unexpected conflicts).

       Options:

       --commands <FILE>
              read history edits from the specified file

       -c, --continue
              continue an edit already in progress

       --edit-plan
              edit remaining actions list

       -k, --keep
              don't strip old nodes after edit is complete

       --abort
              abort an edit in progress

       -o, --outgoing
              changesets not found in destination

       -f, --force
              force outgoing even for unrelated repositories

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              first revision to be edited

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   journal
       track previous positions of bookmarks (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This extension adds a new command: hg journal, which shows you where bookmarks were previously located.

   Commands
   journal
       show the previous position of bookmarks and the working copy:

       hg journal [OPTION]... [BOOKMARKNAME]

       The  journal  is  used  to  see  the  previous commits that bookmarks and the working copy pointed to. By
       default the previous locations for the working copy.  Passing a bookmark name will show all the  previous
       positions  of  that  bookmark.  Use the --all switch to show previous locations for all bookmarks and the
       working copy; each line will then include the bookmark name, or '.' for the working copy, as well.

       If name starts with re:, the remainder of the name is treated as a regular expression. To  match  a  name
       that actually starts with re:, use the prefix literal:.

       By  default  hg  journal  only  shows  the  commit  hash  and  the command that was running at that time.
       -v/--verbose will show the prior hash, the user, and the time at which it happened.

       Use -c/--commits to output log information on each commit hash; at this  point  you  can  use  the  usual
       --patch, --git, --stat and --template switches to alter the log output for these.

       hg journal -T json can be used to produce machine readable output.

       Options:

       --all  show history for all names

       -c, --commits
              show commit metadata

       -p, --patch
              show patch

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       -l,--limit <NUM>
              limit number of changes displayed

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       --style <STYLE>
              display using template map file (DEPRECATED)

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template

   keyword
       expand keywords in tracked files

       This  extension expands RCS/CVS-like or self-customized $Keywords$ in tracked text files selected by your
       configuration.

       Keywords are only expanded in local repositories and not stored in the change history. The mechanism  can
       be regarded as a convenience for the current user or for archive distribution.

       Keywords  expand  to the changeset data pertaining to the latest change relative to the working directory
       parent of each file.

       Configuration is done in the [keyword], [keywordset] and [keywordmaps] sections of hgrc files.

       Example:

       [keyword]
       # expand keywords in every python file except those matching "x*"
       **.py =
       x*    = ignore

       [keywordset]
       # prefer svn- over cvs-like default keywordmaps
       svn = True

       Note   The more specific you are in your filename patterns the less you lose speed in huge repositories.

       For [keywordmaps] template mapping and expansion demonstration and control run hg  kwdemo.  See  hg  help
       templates for a list of available templates and filters.

       Three additional date template filters are provided:

       utcdate

              "2006/09/18 15:13:13"

       svnutcdate

              "2006-09-18 15:13:13Z"

       svnisodate

              "2006-09-18 08:13:13 -700 (Mon, 18 Sep 2006)"

       The  default  template  mappings  (view  with  hg kwdemo -d) can be replaced with customized keywords and
       templates. Again, run hg kwdemo to control the results of your configuration changes.

       Before changing/disabling active keywords, you must run hg kwshrink to avoid storing expanded keywords in
       the change history.

       To force expansion after enabling it, or a configuration change, run hg kwexpand.

       Expansions  spanning more than one line and incremental expansions, like CVS' $Log$, are not supported. A
       keyword template map "Log = {desc}" expands to the first line of the changeset description.

   Commands
   kwdemo
       print [keywordmaps] configuration and an expansion example:

       hg kwdemo [-d] [-f RCFILE] [TEMPLATEMAP]...

       Show current, custom, or default keyword template maps and their expansions.

       Extend the current configuration by specifying maps as arguments  and  using  -f/--rcfile  to  source  an
       external hgrc file.

       Use -d/--default to disable current configuration.

       See hg help templates for information on templates and filters.

       Options:

       -d, --default
              show default keyword template maps

       -f,--rcfile <FILE>
              read maps from rcfile

   kwexpand
       expand keywords in the working directory:

       hg kwexpand [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Run after (re)enabling keyword expansion.

       kwexpand refuses to run if given files contain local changes.

       Options:

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   kwfiles
       show files configured for keyword expansion:

       hg kwfiles [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       List which files in the working directory are matched by the [keyword] configuration patterns.

       Useful  to  prevent  inadvertent keyword expansion and to speed up execution by including only files that
       are actual candidates for expansion.

       See hg help keyword on how to construct patterns both for inclusion and exclusion of files.

       With -A/--all and -v/--verbose the codes used to show the status of files are:

       K = keyword expansion candidate
       k = keyword expansion candidate (not tracked)
       I = ignored
       i = ignored (not tracked)

       Options:

       -A, --all
              show keyword status flags of all files

       -i, --ignore
              show files excluded from expansion

       -u, --unknown
              only show unknown (not tracked) files

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   kwshrink
       revert expanded keywords in the working directory:

       hg kwshrink [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Must be run before changing/disabling active keywords.

       kwshrink refuses to run if given files contain local changes.

       Options:

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   largefiles
       track large binary files

       Large binary files tend to be not very compressible, not very diffable, and not at  all  mergeable.  Such
       files  are  not  handled efficiently by Mercurial's storage format (revlog), which is based on compressed
       binary deltas; storing large binary files as regular Mercurial files wastes bandwidth and disk space  and
       increases  Mercurial's  memory  usage.  The  largefiles  extension  addresses  these problems by adding a
       centralized client-server layer on top of Mercurial: largefiles live  in  a  central  store  out  on  the
       network somewhere, and you only fetch the revisions that you need when you need them.

       largefiles works by maintaining a "standin file" in .hglf/ for each largefile. The standins are small (41
       bytes: an SHA-1 hash plus newline) and are tracked by Mercurial. Largefile revisions  are  identified  by
       the  SHA-1  hash  of their contents, which is written to the standin. largefiles uses that revision ID to
       get/put largefile revisions from/to the central store. This saves both disk space  and  bandwidth,  since
       you don't need to retrieve all historical revisions of large files when you clone or pull.

       To  start  a  new  repository or add new large binary files, just add --large to your hg add command. For
       example:

       $ dd if=/dev/urandom of=randomdata count=2000
       $ hg add --large randomdata
       $ hg commit -m "add randomdata as a largefile"

       When you push a changeset that adds/modifies largefiles to a remote repository, its  largefile  revisions
       will  be  uploaded along with it.  Note that the remote Mercurial must also have the largefiles extension
       enabled for this to work.

       When you pull a changeset that affects largefiles from  a  remote  repository,  the  largefiles  for  the
       changeset will by default not be pulled down. However, when you update to such a revision, any largefiles
       needed by that revision are downloaded and cached (if they have never been downloaded before). One way to
       pull  largefiles  when pulling is thus to use --update, which will update your working copy to the latest
       pulled revision (and thereby downloading any new largefiles).

       If you want to pull largefiles you don't need for update yet, then you can  use  pull  with  the  --lfrev
       option or the hg lfpull command.

       If  you  know  you  are  pulling from a non-default location and want to download all the largefiles that
       correspond to the new changesets at the same time, then you can pull with --lfrev "pulled()".

       If you just want to ensure that you will have the largefiles needed to merge or  rebase  with  new  heads
       that  you are pulling, then you can pull with --lfrev "head(pulled())" flag to pre-emptively download any
       largefiles that are new in the heads you are pulling.

       Keep in mind that network access may now be required to update to changesets that you have not previously
       updated  to.  The  nature of the largefiles extension means that updating is no longer guaranteed to be a
       local-only operation.

       If you already have large files tracked by Mercurial without the largefiles extension, you will  need  to
       convert your repository in order to benefit from largefiles. This is done with the hg lfconvert command:

       $ hg lfconvert --size 10 oldrepo newrepo

       In  repositories that already have largefiles in them, any new file over 10MB will automatically be added
       as a largefile. To change this threshold, set largefiles.minsize in your Mercurial  config  file  to  the
       minimum size in megabytes to track as a largefile, or use the --lfsize option to the add command (also in
       megabytes):

       [largefiles]
       minsize = 2

       $ hg add --lfsize 2

       The largefiles.patterns config option allows you to specify a list of  filename  patterns  (see  hg  help
       patterns) that should always be tracked as largefiles:

       [largefiles]
       patterns =
         *.jpg
         re:.*\.(png|bmp)$
         library.zip
         content/audio/*

       Files that match one of these patterns will be added as largefiles regardless of their size.

       The  largefiles.minsize  and  largefiles.patterns config options will be ignored for any repositories not
       already containing a largefile. To add the first largefile to a repository, you  must  explicitly  do  so
       with the --large flag passed to the hg add command.

   Commands
   lfconvert
       convert a normal repository to a largefiles repository:

       hg lfconvert SOURCE DEST [FILE ...]

       Convert repository SOURCE to a new repository DEST, identical to SOURCE except that certain files will be
       converted as largefiles: specifically, any file that matches any PATTERN  or  whose  size  is  above  the
       minimum  size threshold is converted as a largefile. The size used to determine whether or not to track a
       file as a largefile is the size of the first version of the file.  The  minimum  size  can  be  specified
       either with --size or in configuration as largefiles.size.

       After  running  this command you will need to make sure that largefiles is enabled anywhere you intend to
       push the new repository.

       Use --to-normal to convert largefiles back to normal files; after this, the DEST repository can  be  used
       without largefiles at all.

       Options:

       -s,--size <SIZE>
              minimum size (MB) for files to be converted as largefiles

       --to-normal
              convert from a largefiles repo to a normal repo

   lfpull
       pull largefiles for the specified revisions from the specified source:

       hg lfpull -r REV... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [SOURCE]

       Pull  largefiles  that  are  referenced  from local changesets but missing locally, pulling from a remote
       repository to the local cache.

       If SOURCE is omitted, the 'default' path will be used.  See hg help urls for more information.

       Some examples:

       • pull largefiles for all branch heads:

         hg lfpull -r "head() and not closed()"

       • pull largefiles on the default branch:

         hg lfpull -r "branch(default)"

       Options:

       -r,--rev <VALUE[+]>
              pull largefiles for these revisions

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
              specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
              specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
              do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   lfs
       lfs - large file support (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This extension allows large files to be tracked outside of the normal repository storage and stored on  a
       centralized server, similar to the largefiles extension.  The git-lfs protocol is used when communicating
       with the server, so existing git infrastructure can be harnessed.   Even  though  the  files  are  stored
       outside of the repository, they are still integrity checked in the same manner as normal files.

       The files stored outside of the repository are downloaded on demand, which reduces the time to clone, and
       possibly the local disk usage.  This changes fundamental workflows in a DVCS, so careful  thought  should
       be  given before deploying it.  hg convert can be used to convert LFS repositories to normal repositories
       that no longer require this extension, and do so without changing the commit  hashes.   This  allows  the
       extension  to  be  disabled  if  the  centralized workflow becomes burdensome.  However, the pre and post
       convert clones will not be able to communicate with each other unless the extension is enabled on both.

       To start a new repository, or to add LFS files to  an  existing  one,  just  create  an  .hglfs  file  as
       described  below  in  the  root  directory  of  the repository.  Typically, this file should be put under
       version control, so that the settings will propagate to other repositories with push  and  pull.   During
       any  commit,  Mercurial will consult this file to determine if an added or modified file should be stored
       externally.  The type of storage depends on the characteristics of the file at each commit.  A file  that
       is near a size threshold may switch back and forth between LFS and normal storage, as needed.

       Alternately,  both  normal  repositories and largefile controlled repositories can be converted to LFS by
       using hg convert and the lfs.track config option described below.  The .hglfs file should then be created
       and added, to control subsequent LFS selection.  The hashes are also unchanged in this case.  The LFS and
       non-LFS repositories can be distinguished because the LFS repository  will  abort  any  command  if  this
       extension is disabled.

       Committed  LFS  files  are  held  locally,  until  the repository is pushed.  Prior to pushing the normal
       repository data, the LFS files that are tracked by the outgoing commits are automatically uploaded to the
       configured  central server.  No LFS files are transferred on hg pull or hg clone.  Instead, the files are
       downloaded on demand as they need to be read, if a cached copy cannot be found locally.  Both  committing
       and  downloading  an  LFS  file  will  link  the file to a usercache, to speed up future access.  See the
       usercache config setting described below.

       The extension reads its configuration from a versioned ``.hglfs``
       configuration file found in the root of the working directory. The
       ``.hglfs`` file uses the same syntax as all other Mercurial
       configuration files. It uses a single section, ``[track]``.

       The ``[track]`` section specifies which files are stored as LFS (or
       not). Each line is keyed by a file pattern, with a predicate value.
       The first file pattern match is used, so put more specific patterns
       first.  The available predicates are ``all()``, ``none()``, and
       ``size()``. See "hg help filesets.size" for the latter.

       Example versioned ``.hglfs`` file::

         [track]
         # No Makefile or python file, anywhere, will be LFS
         **Makefile = none()
         **.py = none()

         **.zip = all()
         **.exe = size(">1MB")

         # Catchall for everything not matched above
         ** = size(">10MB")

       Configs:

       [lfs]
       # Remote endpoint. Multiple protocols are supported:
       # - http(s)://user:pass@example.com/path
       #   git-lfs endpoint
       # - file:///tmp/path
       #   local filesystem, usually for testing
       # if unset, lfs will prompt setting this when it must use this value.
       # (default: unset)
       url = https://example.com/repo.git/info/lfs

       # Which files to track in LFS.  Path tests are "**.extname" for file
       # extensions, and "path:under/some/directory" for path prefix.  Both
       # are relative to the repository root.
       # File size can be tested with the "size()" fileset, and tests can be
       # joined with fileset operators.  (See "hg help filesets.operators".)
       #
       # Some examples:
       # - all()                       # everything
       # - none()                      # nothing
       # - size(">20MB")               # larger than 20MB
       # - !**.txt                     # anything not a *.txt file
       # - **.zip | **.tar.gz | **.7z  # some types of compressed files
       # - path:bin                    # files under "bin" in the project root
       # - (**.php & size(">2MB")) | (**.js & size(">5MB")) | **.tar.gz
       #     | (path:bin & !path:/bin/README) | size(">1GB")
       # (default: none())
       #
       # This is ignored if there is a tracked '.hglfs' file, and this setting
       # will eventually be deprecated and removed.
       track = size(">10M")

       # how many times to retry before giving up on transferring an object
       retry = 5

       # the local directory to store lfs files for sharing across local clones.
       # If not set, the cache is located in an OS specific cache location.
       usercache = /path/to/global/cache

   Commands
   logtoprocess
       send ui.log() data to a subprocess (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This extension lets you specify a shell command per ui.log() event, sending all remaining arguments to as
       environment variables to that command.

       Each  positional  argument  to  the  method results in a MSG[N] key in the environment, starting at 1 (so
       MSG1, MSG2, etc.). Each keyword  argument  is  set  as  a  OPT_UPPERCASE_KEY  variable  (so  the  key  is
       uppercased, and prefixed with OPT_). The original event name is passed in the EVENT environment variable,
       and the process ID of mercurial is given in HGPID.

       So given a call ui.log('foo', 'bar', 'baz', spam='eggs'), a script configured  for  the  `foo  event  can
       expect an environment with MSG1=bar, MSG2=baz, and OPT_SPAM=eggs.

       Scripts are configured in the [logtoprocess] section, each key an event name.  For example:

       [logtoprocess]
       commandexception = echo "$MSG2$MSG3" > /var/log/mercurial_exceptions.log

       would log the warning message and traceback of any failed command dispatch.

       Scripts  are  run  asynchronously  as detached daemon processes; mercurial will not ensure that they exit
       cleanly.

   mq
       manage a stack of patches

       This extension lets you work with a stack of patches in a Mercurial repository. It manages two stacks  of
       patches - all known patches, and applied patches (subset of known patches).

       Known patches are represented as patch files in the .hg/patches directory. Applied patches are both patch
       files and changesets.

       Common tasks (use hg help COMMAND for more details):

       create new patch                          qnew
       import existing patch                     qimport

       print patch series                        qseries
       print applied patches                     qapplied

       add known patch to applied stack          qpush
       remove patch from applied stack           qpop
       refresh contents of top applied patch     qrefresh

       By default, mq will automatically use git patches when required to avoid losing file mode  changes,  copy
       records, binary files or empty files creations or deletions. This behavior can be configured with:

       [mq]
       git = auto/keep/yes/no

       If  set  to  'keep',  mq will obey the [diff] section configuration while preserving existing git patches
       upon qrefresh. If set to 'yes' or 'no', mq will override the [diff] section and always  generate  git  or
       regular patches, possibly losing data in the second case.

       It  may  be desirable for mq changesets to be kept in the secret phase (see hg help phases), which can be
       enabled with the following setting:

       [mq]
       secret = True

       You will by default be managing a patch queue named "patches". You can create  other,  independent  patch
       queues with the hg qqueue command.

       If  the  working  directory  contains  uncommitted  files,  qpush,  qpop  and qgoto abort immediately. If
       -f/--force is used, the changes are discarded. Setting:

       [mq]
       keepchanges = True

       make them behave as if --keep-changes were passed, and non-conflicting local changes  will  be  tolerated
       and preserved. If incompatible options such as -f/--force or --exact are passed, this setting is ignored.

       This extension used to provide a strip command. This command now lives in the strip extension.

   Commands
   qapplied
       print the patches already applied:

       hg qapplied [-1] [-s] [PATCH]

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -1, --last
              show only the preceding applied patch

       -s, --summary
              print first line of patch header

   qclone
       clone main and patch repository at same time:

       hg qclone [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST]

       If  source  is local, destination will have no patches applied. If source is remote, this command can not
       check if patches are applied in source, so cannot guarantee that patches are not applied in  destination.
       If you clone remote repository, be sure before that it has no patches applied.

       Source patch repository is looked for in <src>/.hg/patches by default. Use -p <url> to change.

       The patch directory must be a nested Mercurial repository, as would be created by hg init --mq.

       Return 0 on success.

       Options:

       --pull use pull protocol to copy metadata

       -U, --noupdate
              do not update the new working directories

       --uncompressed
              use uncompressed transfer (fast over LAN)

       -p,--patches <REPO>
              location of source patch repository

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
              specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
              specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
              do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

   qcommit
       commit changes in the queue repository (DEPRECATED):

       hg qcommit [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       This command is deprecated; use hg commit --mq instead.

       Options:

       -A, --addremove
              mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing

       --close-branch
              mark a branch head as closed

       --amend
              amend the parent of the working directory

       -s, --secret
              use the secret phase for committing

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -i, --interactive
              use interactive mode

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
              read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
              record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
              record the specified user as committer

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

          aliases: qci

   qdelete
       remove patches from queue:

       hg qdelete [-k] [PATCH]...

       The  patches  must  not  be  applied, and at least one patch is required. Exact patch identifiers must be
       given. With -k/--keep, the patch files are preserved in the patch directory.

       To stop managing a patch and move it into permanent history, use the hg qfinish command.

       Options:

       -k, --keep
              keep patch file

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              stop managing a revision (DEPRECATED)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

          aliases: qremove qrm

   qdiff
       diff of the current patch and subsequent modifications:

       hg qdiff [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Shows a diff which includes the current patch as well as any changes which have been made in the  working
       directory since the last refresh (thus showing what the current patch would become after a qrefresh).

       Use  hg  diff if  you only want to see the changes made since the last qrefresh, or hg export qtip if you
       want to see changes made by the current patch without including changes made since the qrefresh.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -a, --text
              treat all files as text

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       --binary
              generate binary diffs in git mode (default)

       --nodates
              omit dates from diff headers

       --noprefix
              omit a/ and b/ prefixes from filenames

       -p, --show-function
              show which function each change is in

       --reverse
              produce a diff that undoes the changes

       -w, --ignore-all-space
              ignore white space when comparing lines

       -b, --ignore-space-change
              ignore changes in the amount of white space

       -B, --ignore-blank-lines
              ignore changes whose lines are all blank

       -Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
              ignore changes in whitespace at EOL

       -U,--unified <NUM>
              number of lines of context to show

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       --root <DIR>
              produce diffs relative to subdirectory

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   qfinish
       move applied patches into repository history:

       hg qfinish [-a] [REV]...

       Finishes the specified revisions (corresponding to applied patches) by moving them out of mq control into
       regular repository history.

       Accepts  a revision range or the -a/--applied option. If --applied is specified, all applied mq revisions
       are removed from mq control. Otherwise, the given revisions must be at the base of the stack  of  applied
       patches.

       This  can be especially useful if your changes have been applied to an upstream repository, or if you are
       about to push your changes to upstream.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -a, --applied
              finish all applied changesets

   qfold
       fold the named patches into the current patch:

       hg qfold [-e] [-k] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] PATCH...

       Patches must not yet be applied. Each patch will be successively applied to  the  current  patch  in  the
       order  given.  If  all  the  patches apply successfully, the current patch will be refreshed with the new
       cumulative patch, and the folded patches will be deleted. With -k/--keep, the folded patch files will not
       be removed afterwards.

       The  header for each folded patch will be concatenated with the current patch header, separated by a line
       of * * *.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -k, --keep
              keep folded patch files

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
              read commit message from file

   qgoto
       push or pop patches until named patch is at top of stack:

       hg qgoto [OPTION]... PATCH

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       --keep-changes
              tolerate non-conflicting local changes

       -f, --force
              overwrite any local changes

       --no-backup
              do not save backup copies of files

   qguard
       set or print guards for a patch:

       hg qguard [-l] [-n] [PATCH] [-- [+GUARD]... [-GUARD]...]

       Guards control whether a patch can be pushed. A patch with no guards is always pushed.  A  patch  with  a
       positive  guard  ("+foo")  is  pushed  only  if  the  hg qselect command has activated it. A patch with a
       negative guard ("-foo") is never pushed if the hg qselect command has activated it.

       With no arguments, print the currently active guards.  With arguments, set guards for the named patch.

       Note   Specifying negative guards now requires '--'.

       To set guards on another patch:

       hg qguard other.patch -- +2.6.17 -stable

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -l, --list
              list all patches and guards

       -n, --none
              drop all guards

   qheader
       print the header of the topmost or specified patch:

       hg qheader [PATCH]

       Returns 0 on success.

   qimport
       import a patch or existing changeset:

       hg qimport [-e] [-n NAME] [-f] [-g] [-P] [-r REV]... [FILE]...

       The patch is inserted into the series after the last applied patch. If  no  patches  have  been  applied,
       qimport prepends the patch to the series.

       The patch will have the same name as its source file unless you give it a new one with -n/--name.

       You can register an existing patch inside the patch directory with the -e/--existing flag.

       With -f/--force, an existing patch of the same name will be overwritten.

       An  existing  changeset  may be placed under mq control with -r/--rev (e.g. qimport --rev . -n patch will
       place the current revision under mq control). With -g/--git, patches imported with --rev will use the git
       diff format. See the diffs help topic for information on why this is important for preserving rename/copy
       information and permission changes. Use hg qfinish to remove changesets from mq control.

       To import a patch from standard input, pass - as the patch file.  When importing from standard  input,  a
       patch name must be specified using the --name flag.

       To import an existing patch while renaming it:

       hg qimport -e existing-patch -n new-name

       Returns 0 if import succeeded.

       Options:

       -e, --existing
              import file in patch directory

       -n,--name <NAME>
              name of patch file

       -f, --force
              overwrite existing files

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              place existing revisions under mq control

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       -P, --push
              qpush after importing

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   qinit
       init a new queue repository (DEPRECATED):

       hg qinit [-c]

       The  queue  repository  is  unversioned by default. If -c/--create-repo is specified, qinit will create a
       separate nested repository for patches (qinit -c may also be run later to convert  an  unversioned  patch
       repository into a versioned one). You can use qcommit to commit changes to this queue repository.

       This  command  is  deprecated.  Without -c, it's implied by other relevant commands. With -c, use hg init
       --mq instead.

       Options:

       -c, --create-repo
              create queue repository

   qnew
       create a new patch:

       hg qnew [-e] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] PATCH [FILE]...

       qnew creates a new patch on top of the currently-applied patch (if any). The patch  will  be  initialized
       with  any  outstanding  changes  in  the  working directory. You may also use -I/--include, -X/--exclude,
       and/or a list of files after the patch name to add only changes to  matching  files  to  the  new  patch,
       leaving the rest as uncommitted modifications.

       -u/--user  and -d/--date can be used to set the (given) user and date, respectively. -U/--currentuser and
       -D/--currentdate set user to current user and date to current date.

       -e/--edit, -m/--message or -l/--logfile set the patch header as well as the commit message.  If  none  is
       specified, the header is empty and the commit message is '[mq]: PATCH'.

       Use  the -g/--git option to keep the patch in the git extended diff format. Read the diffs help topic for
       more information on why this is important for preserving permission changes and copy/rename information.

       Returns 0 on successful creation of a new patch.

       Options:

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -f, --force
              import uncommitted changes (DEPRECATED)

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       -U, --currentuser
              add "From: <current user>" to patch

       -u,--user <USER>
              add "From: <USER>" to patch

       -D, --currentdate
              add "Date: <current date>" to patch

       -d,--date <DATE>
              add "Date: <DATE>" to patch

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
              read commit message from file

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   qnext
       print the name of the next pushable patch:

       hg qnext [-s]

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -s, --summary
              print first line of patch header

   qpop
       pop the current patch off the stack:

       hg qpop [-a] [-f] [PATCH | INDEX]

       Without argument, pops off the top of the patch stack. If given a patch name, keeps popping  off  patches
       until the named patch is at the top of the stack.

       By  default, abort if the working directory contains uncommitted changes. With --keep-changes, abort only
       if the uncommitted files overlap with patched files. With -f/--force, backup and discard changes made  to
       such files.

       Return 0 on success.

       Options:

       -a, --all
              pop all patches

       -n,--name <NAME>
              queue name to pop (DEPRECATED)

       --keep-changes
              tolerate non-conflicting local changes

       -f, --force
              forget any local changes to patched files

       --no-backup
              do not save backup copies of files

   qprev
       print the name of the preceding applied patch:

       hg qprev [-s]

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -s, --summary
              print first line of patch header

   qpush
       push the next patch onto the stack:

       hg qpush [-f] [-l] [-a] [--move] [PATCH | INDEX]

       By  default, abort if the working directory contains uncommitted changes. With --keep-changes, abort only
       if the uncommitted files overlap with patched files. With -f/--force, backup and patch  over  uncommitted
       changes.

       Return 0 on success.

       Options:

       --keep-changes
              tolerate non-conflicting local changes

       -f, --force
              apply on top of local changes

       -e, --exact
              apply the target patch to its recorded parent

       -l, --list
              list patch name in commit text

       -a, --all
              apply all patches

       -m, --merge
              merge from another queue (DEPRECATED)

       -n,--name <NAME>
              merge queue name (DEPRECATED)

       --move reorder patch series and apply only the patch

       --no-backup
              do not save backup copies of files

   qqueue
       manage multiple patch queues:

       hg qqueue [OPTION] [QUEUE]

       Supports  switching  between  different  patch  queues, as well as creating new patch queues and deleting
       existing ones.

       Omitting a queue name or specifying -l/--list will show you  the  registered  queues  -  by  default  the
       "normal"  patches  queue  is  registered.  The  currently  active  queue  will be marked with "(active)".
       Specifying --active will print only the name of the active queue.

       To create a new queue, use -c/--create. The queue is automatically made active, except in the case  where
       there  are applied patches from the currently active queue in the repository. Then the queue will only be
       created and switching will fail.

       To delete an existing queue, use --delete. You cannot delete the currently active queue.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -l, --list
              list all available queues

       --active
              print name of active queue

       -c, --create
              create new queue

       --rename
              rename active queue

       --delete
              delete reference to queue

       --purge
              delete queue, and remove patch dir

   qrefresh
       update the current patch:

       hg qrefresh [-I] [-X] [-e] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] [-s] [FILE]...

       If any file patterns are provided, the refreshed patch will contain only  the  modifications  that  match
       those patterns; the remaining modifications will remain in the working directory.

       If  -s/--short  is  specified,  files currently included in the patch will be refreshed just like matched
       files and remain in the patch.

       If -e/--edit is specified, Mercurial will start your configured editor for you to  enter  a  message.  In
       case qrefresh fails, you will find a backup of your message in .hg/last-message.txt.

       hg  add/remove/copy/rename  work  as  usual,  though you might want to use git-style patches (-g/--git or
       [diff] git=1) to track copies and renames. See the diffs help topic for more information on the git  diff
       format.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       -s, --short
              refresh only files already in the patch and specified files

       -U, --currentuser
              add/update author field in patch with current user

       -u,--user <USER>
              add/update author field in patch with given user

       -D, --currentdate
              add/update date field in patch with current date

       -d,--date <DATE>
              add/update date field in patch with given date

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
              read commit message from file

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   qrename
       rename a patch:

       hg qrename PATCH1 [PATCH2]

       With one argument, renames the current patch to PATCH1.  With two arguments, renames PATCH1 to PATCH2.

       Returns 0 on success.

          aliases: qmv

   qrestore
       restore the queue state saved by a revision (DEPRECATED):

       hg qrestore [-d] [-u] REV

       This command is deprecated, use hg rebase instead.

       Options:

       -d, --delete
              delete save entry

       -u, --update
              update queue working directory

   qsave
       save current queue state (DEPRECATED):

       hg qsave [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] [-c] [-n NAME] [-e] [-f]

       This command is deprecated, use hg rebase instead.

       Options:

       -c, --copy
              copy patch directory

       -n,--name <NAME>
              copy directory name

       -e, --empty
              clear queue status file

       -f, --force
              force copy

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
              read commit message from file

   qselect
       set or print guarded patches to push:

       hg qselect [OPTION]... [GUARD]...

       Use  the  hg  qguard command to set or print guards on patch, then use qselect to tell mq which guards to
       use. A patch will be pushed if it has no guards or any  positive  guards  match  the  currently  selected
       guard, but will not be pushed if any negative guards match the current guard. For example:

       qguard foo.patch -- -stable    (negative guard)
       qguard bar.patch    +stable    (positive guard)
       qselect stable

       This  activates  the  "stable"  guard.  mq will skip foo.patch (because it has a negative match) but push
       bar.patch (because it has a positive match).

       With no arguments, prints the currently active guards.  With one argument, sets the active guard.

       Use -n/--none to deactivate guards (no other arguments needed).  When no guards are active, patches  with
       positive guards are skipped and patches with negative guards are pushed.

       qselect  can  change the guards on applied patches. It does not pop guarded patches by default. Use --pop
       to pop back to the last applied patch that is not guarded. Use --reapply (which implies  --pop)  to  push
       back to the current patch afterwards, but skip guarded patches.

       Use  -s/--series to print a list of all guards in the series file (no other arguments needed). Use -v for
       more information.

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -n, --none
              disable all guards

       -s, --series
              list all guards in series file

       --pop  pop to before first guarded applied patch

       --reapply
              pop, then reapply patches

   qseries
       print the entire series file:

       hg qseries [-ms]

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -m, --missing
              print patches not in series

       -s, --summary
              print first line of patch header

   qtop
       print the name of the current patch:

       hg qtop [-s]

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -s, --summary
              print first line of patch header

   qunapplied
       print the patches not yet applied:

       hg qunapplied [-1] [-s] [PATCH]

       Returns 0 on success.

       Options:

       -1, --first
              show only the first patch

       -s, --summary
              print first line of patch header

   notify
       hooks for sending email push notifications

       This extension implements hooks to send email notifications when changesets are sent from or received  by
       the local repository.

       First,  enable  the  extension as explained in hg help extensions, and register the hook you want to run.
       incoming and changegroup hooks are run when  changesets  are  received,  while  outgoing  hooks  are  for
       changesets sent to another repository:

       [hooks]
       # one email for each incoming changeset
       incoming.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook
       # one email for all incoming changesets
       changegroup.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook

       # one email for all outgoing changesets
       outgoing.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook

       This  registers  the  hooks.  To  enable  notification, subscribers must be assigned to repositories. The
       [usersubs] section maps multiple repositories to a given recipient. The [reposubs] section maps  multiple
       recipients to a single repository:

       [usersubs]
       # key is subscriber email, value is a comma-separated list of repo patterns
       user@host = pattern

       [reposubs]
       # key is repo pattern, value is a comma-separated list of subscriber emails
       pattern = user@host

       A  pattern  is  a  glob  matching  the  absolute  path to a repository, optionally combined with a revset
       expression. A revset expression, if present, is separated from the glob by a hash. Example:

       [reposubs]
       */widgets#branch(release) = qa-team@example.com

       This sends to qa-team@example.com whenever a changeset on the release branch triggers a  notification  in
       any repository ending in widgets.

       In  order to place them under direct user management, [usersubs] and [reposubs] sections may be placed in
       a separate hgrc file and incorporated by reference:

       [notify]
       config = /path/to/subscriptionsfile

       Notifications will not be sent until the notify.test value is set to False; see below.

       Notifications content can be tweaked with the following configuration entries:

       notify.test
              If True, print messages to stdout instead of sending them. Default: True.

       notify.sources
              Space-separated list of change sources. Notifications are activated only when a changeset's source
              is in this list. Sources may be:

              serve

                     changesets received via http or ssh

              pull

                     changesets received via hg pull

              unbundle

                     changesets received via hg unbundle

              push

                     changesets sent or received via hg push

              bundle

                     changesets sent via hg unbundle

              Default: serve.

       notify.strip
              Number  of  leading  slashes  to  strip  from  url  paths.  By  default,  notifications  reference
              repositories with their absolute path. notify.strip lets you turn them into  relative  paths.  For
              example, notify.strip=3 will change /long/path/repository into repository. Default: 0.

       notify.domain
              Default email domain for sender or recipients with no explicit domain.

       notify.style
              Style file to use when formatting emails.

       notify.template
              Template to use when formatting emails.

       notify.incoming
              Template to use when run as an incoming hook, overriding notify.template.

       notify.outgoing
              Template to use when run as an outgoing hook, overriding notify.template.

       notify.changegroup
              Template to use when running as a changegroup hook, overriding notify.template.

       notify.maxdiff
              Maximum number of diff lines to include in notification email. Set to 0 to disable the diff, or -1
              to include all of it. Default: 300.

       notify.maxsubject
              Maximum number of characters in email's subject line. Default: 67.

       notify.diffstat
              Set to True to include a diffstat before diff content. Default: True.

       notify.merge
              If True, send notifications for merge changesets. Default: True.

       notify.mbox
              If set, append mails to this mbox file instead of sending. Default: None.

       notify.fromauthor
              If set, use the committer of the first changeset in a changegroup for  the  "From"  field  of  the
              notification mail. If not set, take the user from the pushing repo.  Default: False.

       If set, the following entries will also be used to customize the notifications:

       email.from
              Email From address to use if none can be found in the generated email content.

       web.baseurl
              Root   repository  URL  to  combine  with  repository  paths  when  making  references.  See  also
              notify.strip.

   pager
       browse command output with an external pager (DEPRECATED)

       Forcibly enable paging  for  individual  commands  that  don't  typically  request  pagination  with  the
       attend-<command> option. This setting takes precedence over ignore options and defaults:

       [pager]
       attend-cat = false

   patchbomb
       command to send changesets as (a series of) patch emails

       The series is started off with a "[PATCH 0 of N]" introduction, which describes the series as a whole.

       Each  patch  email  has  a  Subject  line  of "[PATCH M of N] ...", using the first line of the changeset
       description as the subject text. The message contains two or three body parts:

       • The changeset description.

       • [Optional] The result of running diffstat on the patch.

       • The patch itself, as generated by hg export.

       Each message refers to the first in the series using the In-Reply-To and References headers, so they will
       show up as a sequence in threaded mail and news readers, and in mail archives.

       To configure other defaults, add a section like this to your configuration file:

       [email]
       from = My Name <my@email>
       to = recipient1, recipient2, ...
       cc = cc1, cc2, ...
       bcc = bcc1, bcc2, ...
       reply-to = address1, address2, ...

       Use [patchbomb] as configuration section name if you need to override global [email] address settings.

       Then you can use the hg email command to mail a series of changesets as a patchbomb.

       You  can  also either configure the method option in the email section to be a sendmail compatible mailer
       or fill out the [smtp] section so that the patchbomb extension can automatically send patchbombs directly
       from the commandline. See the [email] and [smtp] sections in hgrc(5) for details.

       By  default, hg email will prompt for a To or CC header if you do not supply one via configuration or the
       command line.  You can override this to never prompt by configuring an empty value:

       [email]
       cc =

       You can control the default inclusion of an introduction message with the  patchbomb.intro  configuration
       option. The configuration is always overwritten by command line flags like --intro and --desc:

       [patchbomb]
       intro=auto   # include introduction message if more than 1 patch (default)
       intro=never  # never include an introduction message
       intro=always # always include an introduction message

       You  can  specify  a template for flags to be added in subject prefixes. Flags specified by --flag option
       are exported as {flags} keyword:

       [patchbomb]
       flagtemplate = "{separate(' ',
                                 ifeq(branch, 'default', '', branch|upper),
                                 flags)}"

       You can set patchbomb to always ask for confirmation by setting patchbomb.confirm to true.

   Commands
   email
       send changesets by email:

       hg email [OPTION]... [DEST]...

       By default, diffs are sent in the format generated by hg export, one per message. The series starts  with
       a "[PATCH 0 of N]" introduction, which describes the series as a whole.

       Each  patch  email  has  a  Subject  line  of "[PATCH M of N] ...", using the first line of the changeset
       description as the subject text.   The  message  contains  two  or  three  parts.  First,  the  changeset
       description.

       With  the  -d/--diffstat  option, if the diffstat program is installed, the result of running diffstat on
       the patch is inserted.

       Finally, the patch itself, as generated by hg export.

       With the -d/--diffstat or --confirm options, you will be presented with a final summary of  all  messages
       and asked for confirmation before the messages are sent.

       By  default  the  patch  is  included as text in the email body for easy reviewing. Using the -a/--attach
       option will instead create an attachment for the patch. With -i/--inline an  inline  attachment  will  be
       created.  You can include a patch both as text in the email body and as a regular or an inline attachment
       by combining the -a/--attach or -i/--inline with the --body option.

       With -B/--bookmark changesets reachable by the given bookmark are selected.

       With -o/--outgoing, emails will be generated for patches not found in the destination repository (or only
       those which are ancestors of the specified revisions if any are provided)

       With  -b/--bundle,  changesets  are  selected  as  for --outgoing, but a single email containing a binary
       Mercurial bundle as an attachment will be sent. Use the patchbomb.bundletype config option to control the
       bundle type as with hg bundle --type.

       With -m/--mbox, instead of previewing each patchbomb message in a pager or sending the messages directly,
       it will create a UNIX mailbox file with the patch emails. This mailbox file can  be  previewed  with  any
       mail user agent which supports UNIX mbox files.

       With  -n/--test,  all  steps  will  run,  but  mail  will not be sent.  You will be prompted for an email
       recipient address, a subject and an introductory message describing the patches of your patchbomb.   Then
       when all is done, patchbomb messages are displayed.

       In  case  email  sending  fails,  you  will  find  a  backup  of  your  series  introductory  message  in
       .hg/last-email.txt.

       The default behavior of this command can be customized through configuration. (See hg help  patchbomb for
       details)

       Examples:

       hg email -r 3000          # send patch 3000 only
       hg email -r 3000 -r 3001  # send patches 3000 and 3001
       hg email -r 3000:3005     # send patches 3000 through 3005
       hg email 3000             # send patch 3000 (deprecated)

       hg email -o               # send all patches not in default
       hg email -o DEST          # send all patches not in DEST
       hg email -o -r 3000       # send all ancestors of 3000 not in default
       hg email -o -r 3000 DEST  # send all ancestors of 3000 not in DEST

       hg email -B feature       # send all ancestors of feature bookmark

       hg email -b               # send bundle of all patches not in default
       hg email -b DEST          # send bundle of all patches not in DEST
       hg email -b -r 3000       # bundle of all ancestors of 3000 not in default
       hg email -b -r 3000 DEST  # bundle of all ancestors of 3000 not in DEST

       hg email -o -m mbox &&    # generate an mbox file...
         mutt -R -f mbox         # ... and view it with mutt
       hg email -o -m mbox &&    # generate an mbox file ...
         formail -s sendmail \   # ... and use formail to send from the mbox
           -bm -t < mbox         # ... using sendmail

       Before using this command, you will need to enable email in your hgrc. See the [email] section in hgrc(5)
       for details.

       Options:

       -g, --git
              use git extended diff format

       --plain
              omit hg patch header

       -o, --outgoing
              send changes not found in the target repository

       -b, --bundle
              send changes not in target as a binary bundle

       -B,--bookmark <VALUE>
              send changes only reachable by given bookmark

       --bundlename <NAME>
              name of the bundle attachment file (default: bundle)

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              a revision to send

       --force
              run even when remote repository is unrelated (with -b/--bundle)

       --base <REV[+]>
              a base changeset to specify instead of a destination (with -b/--bundle)

       --intro
              send an introduction email for a single patch

       --body send patches as inline message text (default)

       -a, --attach
              send patches as attachments

       -i, --inline
              send patches as inline attachments

       --bcc <VALUE[+]>
              email addresses of blind carbon copy recipients

       -c,--cc <VALUE[+]>
              email addresses of copy recipients

       --confirm
              ask for confirmation before sending

       -d, --diffstat
              add diffstat output to messages

       --date <VALUE>
              use the given date as the sending date

       --desc <VALUE>
              use the given file as the series description

       -f,--from <VALUE>
              email address of sender

       -n, --test
              print messages that would be sent

       -m,--mbox <VALUE>
              write messages to mbox file instead of sending them

       --reply-to <VALUE[+]>
              email addresses replies should be sent to

       -s,--subject <VALUE>
              subject of first message (intro or single patch)

       --in-reply-to <VALUE>
              message identifier to reply to

       --flag <VALUE[+]>
              flags to add in subject prefixes

       -t,--to <VALUE[+]>
              email addresses of recipients

       -e,--ssh <CMD>
              specify ssh command to use

       --remotecmd <CMD>
              specify hg command to run on the remote side

       --insecure
              do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   purge
       command to delete untracked files from the working directory

   Commands
   purge
       removes files not tracked by Mercurial:

       hg purge [OPTION]... [DIR]...

       Delete files not known to Mercurial. This  is  useful  to  test  local  and  uncommitted  changes  in  an
       otherwise-clean source tree.

       This means that purge will delete the following by default:

       • Unknown files: files marked with "?" by hg status

       • Empty directories: in fact Mercurial ignores directories unless they contain files under source control
         management

       But it will leave untouched:

       • Modified and unmodified tracked files

       • Ignored files (unless --all is specified)

       • New files added to the repository (with hg add)

       The --files and --dirs options can be used to direct purge to delete only  files,  only  directories,  or
       both. If neither option is given, both will be deleted.

       If directories are given on the command line, only files in these directories are considered.

       Be  careful  with purge, as you could irreversibly delete some files you forgot to add to the repository.
       If you only want to print the list of files that this program would delete, use the --print option.

       Options:

       -a, --abort-on-err
              abort if an error occurs

       --all  purge ignored files too

       --dirs purge empty directories

       --files
              purge files

       -p, --print
              print filenames instead of deleting them

       -0, --print0
              end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs (implies -p/--print)

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

          aliases: clean

   rebase
       command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor

       This extension lets you rebase changesets in an existing Mercurial repository.

       For more information: https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/RebaseExtension

   Commands
   rebase
       move changeset (and descendants) to a different branch:

       hg rebase [-s REV | -b REV] [-d REV] [OPTION]

       Rebase uses repeated merging to graft changesets from one part of history (the source) onto another  (the
       destination). This can be useful for linearizing local changes relative to a master development tree.

       Published commits cannot be rebased (see hg help phases).  To copy commits, see hg help graft.

       If  you  don't specify a destination changeset (-d/--dest), rebase will use the same logic as hg merge to
       pick a destination.  if the current branch contains exactly one other head, the other head is merged with
       by  default.   Otherwise,  an  explicit revision with which to merge with must be provided.  (destination
       changeset is not modified by rebasing, but new changesets are added as its descendants.)

       Here are the ways to select changesets:

          1. Explicitly select them using --rev.

          2. Use --source to select a root changeset and include all of its descendants.

          3. Use --base to select a changeset; rebase will find ancestors and their descendants  which  are  not
             also ancestors of the destination.

          4. If you do not specify any of --rev, source, or --base, rebase will use --base . as above.

       If  --source  or  --rev is used, special names SRC and ALLSRC can be used in --dest. Destination would be
       calculated per source revision with SRC substituted by that single source revision and ALLSRC substituted
       by all source revisions.

       Rebase will destroy original changesets unless you use --keep.  It will also move your bookmarks (even if
       you do).

       Some changesets may be dropped if they do not  contribute  changes  (e.g.  merges  from  the  destination
       branch).

       Unlike  merge,  rebase will do nothing if you are at the branch tip of a named branch with two heads. You
       will need to explicitly specify source and/or destination.

       If you need to use a tool to automate merge/conflict decisions, you can specify one with --tool,  see  hg
       help merge-tools.  As a caveat: the tool will not be used to mediate when a file was deleted, there is no
       hook presently available for this.

       If a rebase is interrupted to manually resolve a conflict, it can  be  continued  with  --continue/-c  or
       aborted with --abort/-a.

       Examples:

       • move "local changes" (current commit back to branching point) to the current branch tip after a pull:

         hg rebase

       • move a single changeset to the stable branch:

         hg rebase -r 5f493448 -d stable

       • splice a commit and all its descendants onto another part of history:

         hg rebase --source c0c3 --dest 4cf9

       • rebase everything on a branch marked by a bookmark onto the default branch:

         hg rebase --base myfeature --dest default

       • collapse a sequence of changes into a single commit:

         hg rebase --collapse -r 1520:1525 -d .

       • move a named branch while preserving its name:

         hg rebase -r "branch(featureX)" -d 1.3 --keepbranches

       • stabilize orphaned changesets so history looks linear:

         hg rebase -r 'orphan()-obsolete()' -d 'first(max((successors(max(roots(ALLSRC) & ::SRC)^)-obsolete())::) + max(::((roots(ALLSRC) & ::SRC)^)-obsolete()))'

       Configuration Options:

       You can make rebase require a destination if you set the following config option:

       [commands]
       rebase.requiredest = True

       By  default,  rebase  will  close  the  transaction  after each commit. For performance purposes, you can
       configure rebase to use a single transaction across the entire rebase. WARNING: This setting introduces a
       significant risk of losing the work you've done in a rebase if the rebase aborts unexpectedly:

       [rebase]
       singletransaction = True

       By  default,  rebase writes to the working copy, but you can configure it to run in-memory for for better
       performance, and to allow it to run if the working copy is dirty:

       [rebase]
       experimental.inmemory = True

       Return Values:

       Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing to rebase or there are unresolved conflicts.

       Options:

       -s,--source <REV>
              rebase the specified changeset and descendants

       -b,--base <REV>
              rebase everything from branching point of specified changeset

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              rebase these revisions

       -d,--dest <REV>
              rebase onto the specified changeset

       --collapse
              collapse the rebased changesets

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as collapse commit message

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
              read collapse commit message from file

       -k, --keep
              keep original changesets

       --keepbranches
              keep original branch names

       -D, --detach
              (DEPRECATED)

       -i, --interactive
              (DEPRECATED)

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
              specify merge tool

       -c, --continue
              continue an interrupted rebase

       -a, --abort
              abort an interrupted rebase

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template (EXPERIMENTAL)

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   record
       commands to interactively select changes for commit/qrefresh (DEPRECATED)

       The feature provided by this extension has been moved into core Mercurial as hg commit --interactive.

   Commands
   qrecord
       interactively record a new patch:

       hg qrecord [OPTION]... PATCH [FILE]...

       See hg help qnew & hg help record for more information and usage.

   record
       interactively select changes to commit:

       hg record [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       If a list of files is omitted, all changes reported by hg status will be candidates for recording.

       See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date.

       If using the text interface (see hg help config), you will be prompted for whether to record  changes  to
       each  modified  file,  and  for  files with multiple changes, for each change to use. For each query, the
       following responses are possible:

       y - record this change
       n - skip this change
       e - edit this change manually

       s - skip remaining changes to this file
       f - record remaining changes to this file

       d - done, skip remaining changes and files
       a - record all changes to all remaining files
       q - quit, recording no changes

       ? - display help

       This command is not available when committing a merge.

       Options:

       -A, --addremove
              mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing

       --close-branch
              mark a branch head as closed

       --amend
              amend the parent of the working directory

       -s, --secret
              use the secret phase for committing

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as commit message

       -l,--logfile <FILE>
              read commit message from file

       -d,--date <DATE>
              record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
              record the specified user as committer

       -S, --subrepos
              recurse into subrepositories

       -w, --ignore-all-space
              ignore white space when comparing lines

       -b, --ignore-space-change
              ignore changes in the amount of white space

       -B, --ignore-blank-lines
              ignore changes whose lines are all blank

       -Z, --ignore-space-at-eol
              ignore changes in whitespace at EOL

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   releasenotes
       generate release notes from commit messages (EXPERIMENTAL)

       It is common to maintain files detailing changes in a project between releases. Maintaining  these  files
       can  be  difficult  and time consuming.  The hg releasenotes command provided by this extension makes the
       process simpler by automating it.

   Commands
   releasenotes
       parse release notes from commit messages into an output file:

       hg releasenotes [-r REV] [-c] FILE

       Given an output file and set of revisions, this command will parse commit messages for release notes then
       add them to the output file.

       Release notes are defined in commit messages as ReStructuredText directives. These have the form:

       .. directive:: title

          content

       Each  directive  maps  to  an  output  section  in  a  generated  release  notes  file,  which  itself is
       ReStructuredText. For example, the .. feature:: directive would map to a New Features section.

       Release note directives can be either short-form or long-form. In short- form, title is omitted  and  the
       release  note  is rendered as a bullet list. In long form, a sub-section with the title title is added to
       the section.

       The FILE argument controls the output file to write gathered release notes to. The format of the file is:

       Section 1
       =========

       ...

       Section 2
       =========

       ...

       Only sections with defined release notes are emitted.

       If a section only has short-form notes, it will consist of bullet list:

       Section
       =======

       * Release note 1
       * Release note 2

       If a section has long-form notes, sub-sections will be emitted:

       Section
       =======

       Note 1 Title
       ------------

       Description of the first long-form note.

       Note 2 Title
       ------------

       Description of the second long-form note.

       If the FILE argument points to an existing file, that file will be parsed for release  notes  having  the
       format  that  would  be  generated  by this command. The notes from the processed commit messages will be
       merged into this parsed set.

       During release notes merging:

       • Duplicate items are automatically ignored

       • Items that are different are automatically ignored if the similarity is greater than a threshold.

       This means that the release notes file can be updated independently from this command and changes  should
       not  be  lost  when  running  this  command  on that file. A particular use case for this is to tweak the
       wording of a release note after it has been added to the release notes file.

       The -c/--check option checks the commit message for invalid admonitions.

       The -l/--list option, presents the user with a list of existing available admonitions  along  with  their
       title. This also includes the custom admonitions (if any).

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
              revisions to process for release notes

       -c, --check
              checks for validity of admonitions (if any)

       -l, --list
              list the available admonitions with their title

   relink
       recreates hardlinks between repository clones

   Commands
   relink
       recreate hardlinks between two repositories:

       hg relink [ORIGIN]

       When repositories are cloned locally, their data files will be hardlinked so that they only use the space
       of a single repository.

       Unfortunately, subsequent pulls into either repository will break hardlinks for any files touched by  the
       new changesets, even if both repositories end up pulling the same changes.

       Similarly, passing --rev to "hg clone" will fail to use any hardlinks, falling back to a complete copy of
       the source repository.

       This command lets you recreate those hardlinks and reclaim that wasted space.

       This repository will be relinked to share space with ORIGIN, which must be on the  same  local  disk.  If
       ORIGIN is omitted, looks for "default-relink", then "default", in [paths].

       Do  not  attempt  any read operations on this repository while the command is running. (Both repositories
       will be locked against writes.)

   schemes
       extend schemes with shortcuts to repository swarms

       This extension allows you to specify shortcuts for parent URLs with a lot of repositories to act  like  a
       scheme, for example:

       [schemes]
       py = http://code.python.org/hg/

       After that you can use it like:

       hg clone py://trunk/

       Additionally there is support for some more complex schemas, for example used by Google Code:

       [schemes]
       gcode = http://{1}.googlecode.com/hg/

       The  syntax  is taken from Mercurial templates, and you have unlimited number of variables, starting with
       {1} and continuing with {2}, {3} and so on. This variables will receive parts of URL supplied,  split  by
       /. Anything not specified as {part} will be just appended to an URL.

       For convenience, the extension adds these schemes by default:

       [schemes]
       py = http://hg.python.org/
       bb = https://bitbucket.org/
       bb+ssh = ssh://hg@bitbucket.org/
       gcode = https://{1}.googlecode.com/hg/
       kiln = https://{1}.kilnhg.com/Repo/

       You can override a predefined scheme by defining a new scheme with the same name.

   Commands
   share
       share a common history between several working directories

   Automatic Pooled Storage for Clones
       When  this  extension  is  active,  hg clone can be configured to automatically share/pool storage across
       multiple clones. This mode effectively converts hg clone to hg clone + hg share.  The  benefit  of  using
       this mode is the automatic management of store paths and intelligent pooling of related repositories.

       The following share. config options influence this feature:

       share.pool

              Filesystem  path  where  shared  repository  data  will  be  stored.  When  defined, hg clone will
              automatically use shared repository storage instead of creating a store inside each clone.

       share.poolnaming

              How directory names in share.pool are constructed.

              "identity" means the name is derived from the first changeset in the  repository.  In  this  mode,
              different  remotes  share  storage if their root/initial changeset is identical. In this mode, the
              local shared repository is an aggregate of all encountered remote repositories.

              "remote" means the name is derived from the source repository's path or URL. In this mode, storage
              is  only  shared  if  the  path  or  URL  requested  in  the hg clone command matches exactly to a
              repository that was cloned before.

              The default naming mode is "identity".

   Commands
   share
       create a new shared repository:

       hg share [-U] [-B] SOURCE [DEST]

       Initialize a new repository and working directory that shares its history (and optionally bookmarks) with
       another repository.

       Note   using rollback or extensions that destroy/modify history (mq, rebase, etc.) can cause considerable
              confusion with shared clones. In particular, if two shared clones are both  updated  to  the  same
              changeset,  and  one  of them destroys that changeset with rollback, the other clone will suddenly
              stop working: all operations will fail with "abort: working directory  has  unknown  parent".  The
              only  known  workaround  is  to use debugsetparents on the broken clone to reset it to a changeset
              that still exists.

       Options:

       -U, --noupdate
              do not create a working directory

       -B, --bookmarks
              also share bookmarks

       --relative
              point to source using a relative path (EXPERIMENTAL)

   unshare
       convert a shared repository to a normal one:

       hg unshare

       Copy the store data to the repo and remove the sharedpath data.

   shelve
       save and restore changes to the working directory

       The "hg shelve" command saves changes made to the working directory and reverts those changes,  resetting
       the working directory to a clean state.

       Later  on,  the  "hg unshelve" command restores the changes saved by "hg shelve". Changes can be restored
       even after updating to a different parent, in which case Mercurial's merge  machinery  will  resolve  any
       conflicts if necessary.

       You can have more than one shelved change outstanding at a time; each shelved change has a distinct name.
       For details, see the help for "hg shelve".

   Commands
   shelve
       save and set aside changes from the working directory:

       hg shelve [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       Shelving takes files that "hg status" reports as not clean,  saves  the  modifications  to  a  bundle  (a
       shelved change), and reverts the files so that their state in the working directory becomes clean.

       To restore these changes to the working directory, using "hg unshelve"; this will work even if you switch
       to a different commit.

       When no files are specified, "hg shelve" saves all not-clean files. If specific files or directories  are
       named, only changes to those files are shelved.

       In  bare  shelve (when no files are specified, without interactive, include and exclude option), shelving
       remembers information if the working directory was on  newly  created  branch,  in  other  words  working
       directory  was  on  different  branch than its first parent. In this situation unshelving restores branch
       information to the working directory.

       Each shelved change has a name that makes it easier to find later.  The name of a shelved change defaults
       to  being  based on the active bookmark, or if there is no active bookmark, the current named branch.  To
       specify a different name, use --name.

       To see a list of existing shelved changes, use the --list option. For  each  shelved  change,  this  will
       print its name, age, and description; use --patch or --stat for more details.

       To delete specific shelved changes, use --delete. To delete all shelved changes, use --cleanup.

       Options:

       -A, --addremove
              mark new/missing files as added/removed before shelving

       -u, --unknown
              store unknown files in the shelve

       --cleanup
              delete all shelved changes

       --date <DATE>
              shelve with the specified commit date

       -d, --delete
              delete the named shelved change(s)

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       -l, --list
              list current shelves

       -m,--message <TEXT>
              use text as shelve message

       -n,--name <NAME>
              use the given name for the shelved commit

       -p, --patch
              show patch

       -i, --interactive
              interactive mode, only works while creating a shelve

       --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   unshelve
       restore a shelved change to the working directory:

       hg unshelve [[-n] SHELVED]

       This  command  accepts an optional name of a shelved change to restore. If none is given, the most recent
       shelved change is used.

       If a shelved change is applied successfully, the bundle that contains the shelved changes is moved  to  a
       backup location (.hg/shelve-backup).

       Since you can restore a shelved change on top of an arbitrary commit, it is possible that unshelving will
       result in a conflict between your changes and the commits you are unshelving onto. If  this  occurs,  you
       must  resolve  the conflict, then use --continue to complete the unshelve operation. (The bundle will not
       be moved until you successfully complete the unshelve.)

       (Alternatively, you can use --abort to abandon an unshelve that  causes  a  conflict.  This  reverts  the
       unshelved changes, and leaves the bundle in place.)

       If  bare shelved change(when no files are specified, without interactive, include and exclude option) was
       done on newly created branch it would restore branch information to the working directory.

       After a successful unshelve, the shelved changes are stored in a backup directory. Only the N most recent
       backups  are  kept.  N  defaults  to  10  but can be overridden using the shelve.maxbackups configuration
       option.

       Timestamp in seconds is used to decide order of backups. More than maxbackups backups are kept,  if  same
       timestamp prevents from deciding exact order of them, for safety.

       Options:

       -a, --abort
              abort an incomplete unshelve operation

       -c, --continue
              continue an incomplete unshelve operation

       -k, --keep
              keep shelve after unshelving

       -n,--name <NAME>
              restore shelved change with given name

       -t,--tool <VALUE>
              specify merge tool

       --date <DATE>
              set date for temporary commits (DEPRECATED)

   show
       unified command to show various repository information (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This   extension  provides  the  hg  show command,  which  provides  a  central  command  for  displaying
       commonly-accessed repository data and views of that data.

       The following config options can influence operation.

   commands
       show.aliasprefix

              List of strings that will register aliases for views. e.g. s will effectively set  config  options
              alias.s<view> = show <view> for all views. i.e. hg swork would execute hg show work.

              Aliases that would conflict with existing registrations will not be performed.

   Commands
   show
       show various repository information:

       hg show VIEW

       A requested view of repository data is displayed.

       If no view is requested, the list of available views is shown and the command aborts.

       Note   There  are no backwards compatibility guarantees for the output of this command. Output may change
              in any future Mercurial release.

              Consumers wanting stable command output should specify a template via -T/--template.

       List of available views:

       bookmarks   bookmarks and their associated changeset

       stack       current line of work

       work        changesets that aren't finished

       Options:

       -T,--template <TEMPLATE>
              display with template

   sparse
       allow sparse checkouts of the working directory (EXPERIMENTAL)

       (This extension is not yet protected by backwards compatibility  guarantees.  Any  aspect  may  break  in
       future releases until this notice is removed.)

       This  extension  allows the working directory to only consist of a subset of files for the revision. This
       allows specific files or directories to be explicitly included or excluded.  Many  repository  operations
       have performance proportional to the number of files in the working directory. So only realizing a subset
       of files in the working directory can improve performance.

   Sparse Config Files
       The set of files that are part of a sparse checkout are defined by a sparse config file. The file defines
       3  things: includes (files to include in the sparse checkout), excludes (files to exclude from the sparse
       checkout), and profiles (links to other config files).

       The file format is newline delimited. Empty lines and lines beginning with # are ignored.

       Lines beginning with  %include  ``  denote  another  sparse  config  file  to  include.  e.g.  ``%include
       tests.sparse. The filename is relative to the repository root.

       The  special  lines  [include]  and  [exclude]  denote the section for includes and excludes that follow,
       respectively. It is illegal to have [include] after [exclude].

       Non-special lines resemble file patterns to be added to either includes or excludes. The syntax of  these
       lines  is documented by hg help patterns.  Patterns are interpreted as glob: by default and match against
       the root of the repository.

       Exclusion patterns take precedence over inclusion patterns. So even if a file is explicitly included,  an
       [exclude] entry can remove it.

       For example, say you have a repository with 3 directories, frontend/, backend/, and tools/. frontend/ and
       backend/ correspond to different projects and it is uncommon for someone working on one to need the files
       for  the  other.  But  tools/  contains  files shared between both projects. Your sparse config files may
       resemble:

       # frontend.sparse
       frontend/**
       tools/**

       # backend.sparse
       backend/**
       tools/**

       Say the backend grows in size. Or there's a directory with thousands of files you wish  to  exclude.  You
       can modify the profile to exclude certain files:

       [include]
       backend/**
       tools/**

       [exclude]
       tools/tests/**

   Commands
   split
       command to split a changeset into smaller ones (EXPERIMENTAL)

   Commands
   split
       split a changeset into smaller ones:

       hg split [--no-rebase] [[-r] REV]

       Repeatedly  prompt  changes  and  commit  message  for  new changesets until there is nothing left in the
       original changeset.

       If --rev was not given, split the working directory parent.

       By default, rebase connected non-obsoleted descendants onto the new changeset. Use --no-rebase  to  avoid
       the rebase.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV>
              revision to split

       --rebase
              rebase descendants after split (default: True)

       -d,--date <DATE>
              record the specified date as commit date

       -u,--user <USER>
              record the specified user as committer

   strip
       strip changesets and their descendants from history

       This  extension  allows  you  to  strip changesets and all their descendants from the repository. See the
       command help for details.

   Commands
   strip
       strip changesets and all their descendants from the repository:

       hg strip [-k] [-f] [-B bookmark] [-r] REV...

       The strip command removes the specified changesets and all their descendants. If  the  working  directory
       has  uncommitted  changes,  the  operation  is aborted unless the --force flag is supplied, in which case
       changes will be discarded.

       If a parent of the working directory is stripped,  then  the  working  directory  will  automatically  be
       updated to the most recent available ancestor of the stripped parent after the operation completes.

       Any  stripped  changesets  are  stored  in  .hg/strip-backup  as a bundle (see hg help bundle and hg help
       unbundle). They can be restored by running hg  unbundle  .hg/strip-backup/BUNDLE,  where  BUNDLE  is  the
       bundle file created by the strip. Note that the local revision numbers will in general be different after
       the restore.

       Use the --no-backup option to discard the backup bundle once the operation completes.

       Strip is not a history-rewriting operation and can be used on changesets in the public phase. But if  the
       stripped changesets have been pushed to a remote repository you will likely pull them again.

       Return 0 on success.

       Options:

       -r,--rev <REV[+]>
              strip specified revision (optional, can specify revisions without this option)

       -f, --force
              force removal of changesets, discard uncommitted changes (no backup)

       --no-backup
              no backups

       --nobackup
              no backups (DEPRECATED)

       -n     ignored  (DEPRECATED)

       -k, --keep
              do not modify working directory during strip

       -B,--bookmark <VALUE[+]>
              remove revs only reachable from given bookmark

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   transplant
       command to transplant changesets from another branch

       This  extension  allows  you  to  transplant  changes  to  another  parent  revision, possibly in another
       repository. The transplant is done using 'diff' patches.

       Transplanted patches are recorded in .hg/transplant/transplants, as a map from a changeset  hash  to  its
       hash in the source repository.

   Commands
   transplant
       transplant changesets from another branch:

       hg transplant [-s REPO] [-b BRANCH [-a]] [-p REV] [-m REV] [REV]...

       Selected  changesets will be applied on top of the current working directory with the log of the original
       changeset. The changesets are copied and will thus appear twice in the history with different identities.

       Consider using the graft command if everything is inside the same repository - it  will  use  merges  and
       will  usually  give  a better result.  Use the rebase extension if the changesets are unpublished and you
       want to move them instead of copying them.

       If --log is specified, log messages will have a comment appended of the form:

       (transplanted from CHANGESETHASH)

       You can rewrite the changelog message with the --filter option.  Its argument will be  invoked  with  the
       current changelog message as $1 and the patch as $2.

       --source/-s  specifies  another repository to use for selecting changesets, just as if it temporarily had
       been pulled.  If --branch/-b is specified, these revisions will be used  as  heads  when  deciding  which
       changesets to transplant, just as if only these revisions had been pulled.  If --all/-a is specified, all
       the revisions up to the heads specified with --branch will be transplanted.

       Example:

       • transplant all changes up to REV on top of your current revision:

         hg transplant --branch REV --all

       You can optionally mark selected transplanted changesets as merge changesets. You will not be prompted to
       transplant  any  ancestors of a merged transplant, and you can merge descendants of them normally instead
       of transplanting them.

       Merge changesets may be transplanted directly by specifying the proper parent  changeset  by  calling  hg
       transplant --parent.

       If no merges or revisions are provided, hg transplant will start an interactive changeset browser.

       If  a  changeset  application  fails, you can fix the merge by hand and then resume where you left off by
       calling hg transplant --continue/-c.

       Options:

       -s,--source <REPO>
              transplant changesets from REPO

       -b,--branch <REV[+]>
              use this source changeset as head

       -a, --all
              pull all changesets up to the --branch revisions

       -p,--prune <REV[+]>
              skip over REV

       -m,--merge <REV[+]>
              merge at REV

       --parent <REV>
              parent to choose when transplanting merge

       -e, --edit
              invoke editor on commit messages

       --log  append transplant info to log message

       -c, --continue
              continue last transplant session after fixing conflicts

       --filter <CMD>
              filter changesets through command

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   uncommit
       uncommit part or all of a local changeset (EXPERIMENTAL)

       This command undoes the effect of a local commit, returning  the  affected  files  to  their  uncommitted
       state.  This  means that files modified, added or removed in the changeset will be left unchanged, and so
       will remain modified, added and removed in the working directory.

   Commands
   unamend
       undo the most recent amend operation on a current changeset:

       hg unamend

       This command will roll back to the previous version of a changeset, leaving working directory in state in
       which  it was before running hg amend (e.g. files modified as part of an amend will be marked as modified
       hg status)

   uncommit
       uncommit part or all of a local changeset:

       hg uncommit [OPTION]... [FILE]...

       This command undoes the effect of a local commit, returning  the  affected  files  to  their  uncommitted
       state.  This  means  that  files modified or deleted in the changeset will be left unchanged, and so will
       remain modified in the working directory.

       Options:

       --keep allow an empty commit after uncommiting

       -I,--include <PATTERN[+]>
              include names matching the given patterns

       -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]>
              exclude names matching the given patterns

       [+] marked option can be specified multiple times

   win32mbcs
       allow the use of MBCS paths with problematic encodings

       Some MBCS encodings are not good for some path operations (i.e.  splitting path, case  conversion,  etc.)
       with  its  encoded  bytes.  We  call such a encoding (i.e. shift_jis and big5) as "problematic encoding".
       This extension can be used to fix the issue with those encodings by wrapping some functions to convert to
       Unicode string before path operation.

       This extension is useful for:

       • Japanese Windows users using shift_jis encoding.

       • Chinese Windows users using big5 encoding.

       • All users who use a repository with one of problematic encodings on case-insensitive file system.

       This extension is not needed for:

       • Any user who use only ASCII chars in path.

       • Any user who do not use any of problematic encodings.

       Note that there are some limitations on using this extension:

       • You should use single encoding in one repository.

       • If the repository path ends with 0x5c, .hg/hgrc cannot be read.

       • win32mbcs is not compatible with fixutf8 extension.

       By  default,  win32mbcs  uses  encoding.encoding  decided  by Mercurial.  You can specify the encoding by
       config option:

       [win32mbcs]
       encoding = sjis

       It is useful for the users who want to commit with UTF-8 log message.

   win32text
       perform automatic newline conversion (DEPRECATED)

          Deprecation: The win32text extension requires each user to configure the extension again and again for
          each clone since the configuration is not copied when cloning.

          We  have  therefore  made  the  eol  as an alternative. The eol uses a version controlled file for its
          configuration and each clone will therefore use the right settings from the start.

       To perform automatic newline conversion, use:

       [extensions]
       win32text =
       [encode]
       ** = cleverencode:
       # or ** = macencode:

       [decode]
       ** = cleverdecode:
       # or ** = macdecode:

       If not doing conversion, to make sure you do not commit CRLF/CR by accident:

       [hooks]
       pretxncommit.crlf = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcrlf
       # or pretxncommit.cr = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcr

       To do the same check on a server to prevent CRLF/CR from being pushed or pulled:

       [hooks]
       pretxnchangegroup.crlf = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcrlf
       # or pretxnchangegroup.cr = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcr

   zeroconf
       discover and advertise repositories on the local network

       The zeroconf extension will advertise hg serve instances over DNS-SD so that they can be discovered using
       the hg paths command without knowing the server's address.

       To allow other people to discover your repository using run hg serve in your repository:

       $ cd test
       $ hg serve

       You can discover Zeroconf-enabled repositories by running hg paths:

       $ hg paths
       zc-test = http://example.com:8000/test

FILES

       /etc/mercurial/hgrc, $HOME/.hgrc, .hg/hgrc

              This  file  contains defaults and configuration. Values in .hg/hgrc override those in $HOME/.hgrc,
              and these override settings made in the global /etc/mercurial/hgrc configuration.  See hgrc(5) for
              details of the contents and format of these files.

       .hgignore

              This  file  contains  regular  expressions  (one per line) that describe file names that should be
              ignored by hg. For details, see hgignore(5).

       .hgsub

              This file defines the  locations  of  all  subrepositories,  and  tells  where  the  subrepository
              checkouts came from. For details, see hg help subrepos.

       .hgsubstate

              This  file  is  where  Mercurial  stores all nested repository states. NB: This file should not be
              edited manually.

       .hgtags

              This file contains changeset hash values and text tag names (one of each separated by spaces) that
              correspond to tagged versions of the repository contents. The file content is encoded using UTF-8.

       .hg/last-message.txt

              This file is used by hg commit to store a backup of the commit message in case the commit fails.

       .hg/localtags

              This  file  can  be  used  to  define local tags which are not shared among repositories. The file
              format is the same as for .hgtags, but it is encoded using the local system encoding.

       Some commands (e.g. revert) produce backup files ending in .orig, if the .orig file already exists and is
       not tracked by Mercurial, it will be overwritten.

BUGS

       Probably lots, please post them to the mailing list (see Resources below) when you find them.

SEE ALSO

       hgignore(5), hgrc(5)

AUTHOR

       Written by Matt Mackall <mpm@selenic.com>

RESOURCES

       Main Web Site: https://mercurial-scm.org/

       Source code repository: https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg

       Mailing list: https://www.mercurial-scm.org/mailman/listinfo/mercurial/

COPYING

       Copyright  (C)  2005-2018  Matt Mackall.  Free use of this software is granted under the terms of the GNU
       General Public License version 2 or any later version.

AUTHOR

       Matt Mackall <mpm@selenic.com>

       Organization: Mercurial

                                                                                                           HG(1)